Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . Adding Project Levels . . Creating a Column Grid . Adding Beams . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77

v

Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

vi | Contents

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 263 . 265 . 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411

Contents | vii

Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 412 . 415 . 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

viii | Contents

Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 525 . 536 . 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665

Contents | ix

Working with Detail Groups . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 668 . 668 . 671 . 674 . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

x | Contents

Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 803 . 805 . 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

schedules. and phases when you need it. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Understanding the Basics In this lesson. and schedules required for a building project. and open Metric\Templates. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. If you move the partition. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. you will use the default template. quantities. every drawing sheet. how to navigate the user interface. review the Revit Architecture templates. As you work in drawing and schedule views. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. 13 Click OK. drawings. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. construction. click Training Files. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. drawing sheets. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the hierarchy of elements. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. and customize the project as necessary. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. In this case. sections. If the length of the elevation is changed. the door retains this relationship to the partition. In this case. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. and plans. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the parameter is one of association or connection. the operation of the software is parametric. For most tutorial projects. 2D and 3D view. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. hence. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and click Open. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved.rte. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. and residential. In the Revit Architecture model. You learn the terminology. the floor or roof remains connected. 12 Select DefaultMetric. scope.

For example. tags. walls. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. tags. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and keynotes are annotation elements. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. grids. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. levels. and 2D detail components. doors. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. If you can draw. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. windows. Understanding the Basics | 7 . Examples include detail lines. They display in relevant views of the model. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. dimensions. doors. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and roofs are model elements. and reference planes are datum elements.When you change something. dimensions. programming is not required. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. walls and roofs are hosts. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and cabinets are model components. For example. For example. Datum elements help to define project context. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. filled regions. They help to describe or document the model. For example. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. windows.

by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. floors. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. section views. or bottom of foundation. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. elevation views. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. you can explicitly control them. By using a single project file. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Most often. and ceilings. from geometry to construction data. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. schedules. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building.In Revit Architecture. and so forth). To place levels. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. and types. and drawings of the design. top of wall. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. Project: In Revit Architecture. first floor. families. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. Often. you do nothing to establish these relationships. for example. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. In other cases. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. views of the project. However. for example. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. This information includes components used to design the model. you must be in a section or elevation view. such as roofs. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The project file contains all information for the building design.

6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. For example. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . In the following illustration. and levels. A type can also be a style. making it easy to understand what each button represents. roofs. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. specifically its clear user interface. A type can be a specific size of a family. dimensions. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. System families can be transferred between projects. For example.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. identical use. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). ceilings. and similar graphical representation. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. For example. In the steps that follow. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. the user interface is labeled. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. categories of model elements include walls and beams. floors. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). System families include walls. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. However. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use.

The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. This creates a new project based on the default template.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. By default. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. In addition. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. click (New). new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name.

For example. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. Many of the commands have shortcut keys.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. you type the required key combination to perform the command. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. and View. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. Edit. which are listed on the menu. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. While working in the drawing area. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. when you add a door.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. 9 In the Type Selector. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. For example. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. a door type is specified. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. When you select the Door tool. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. On the left side of the Options Bar. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector.

There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. immediately below the Type Selector. In the drawing area. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . The Show Design Bars dialog displays.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface.

14 | Chapter 1 Introduction .11 Click OK. click the tab in the Design Bar. In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. select Views (all). The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar.

families.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. double-click its name. walls. reports. families. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. and group name. elevations. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. and rename views. schedules. family category (doors. 3D). and groups. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. To open a view. windows). You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The browser is dockable. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. delete. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. sheets. Navigating the User Interface | 15 .

you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. Do not click. The cursor displays as a pencil. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click Cancel. In the bottom left corner of the window. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. click Wall.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. In this case." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. After creating a browser organization scheme.

and then click a specific menu command or button for help. Click the Help button. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. Windows: From any window. When you place the cursor over an element. regarding selected elements in a view. You can use this tri-pane. Tooltips: To see tooltips. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. find a keyword on the Index tab. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. If no Help button displays. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. After you are familiar with these tasks. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. The status bar also provides information.18 On the Design Bar. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 20 Press TAB. click on the Standard toolbar. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Toolbar: From the toolbar. In the status bar. It highlights when the cursor is over it. press F1 for context-sensitive help. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. press F1 for help. click Modify to end the Wall command. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. in conjunction with tooltips. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . In addition. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. There are several tools that help you find information. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print.

18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). click Training Files.rvt. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. In the following steps. 5 On the View toolbar. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. In the drawing area. For example. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. the view zooms out from the building model. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. There are several ways to access zoom options. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

NOTE As you zoom in and out. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 7 Click in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. . The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . When you release the mouse button. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. on the View toolbar. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. 10 To display SteeringWheels. If you do not have a wheel mouse. As you move the mouse.

expand Floor Plans. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. referred to as shape handles. For more information about SteeringWheels. These are the drag controls. click Settings menu ➤ Options. Small blue dots. When drawing or modifying a building model. Similar controls. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 15 To exit the wheel. and select the wall. display along the ends. press ESC. expand Views (all). moving the wheel to the desired location. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and then using the Zoom tool again. 17 Type ZR. and click Help. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. Cnst. bottoms. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. and click the SteeringWheels tab. and double-click 2nd Flr. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . called drag controls. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. as shown. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out.

for example. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. as shown. click (Move). click to specify the starting position. Some commands. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. and click again to specify the ending position. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. to lengthen the wall. After selecting the element to move. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . and on the Tools toolbar. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. In this case. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. such as Move and Copy. 23 Click next to the lower wall.18 Click and drag the left control. The table moves down. require 2 clicks to complete the command. you want to move the table closer to the wall.

Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. on the Standard toolbar. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In this example. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. and click again to end it. or press CTRL+Z. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Some commands. and drag it on top of the table. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. such as the Lines command. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . select the second item in the list. click Lines. 24 Select the plant. Move. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. click the Undo command. 26 On the Undo menu. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. The table and plant are returned to their original locations.

On the Design Bar. Press ESC twice. click Modify. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.29 To end the command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 .

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. illustrating how building components work together. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. but for training purposes. In this tutorial. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. and annotate building assemblies. or referenced as a drafting view. this tutorial uses imperial units only. detail. 27 . Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. Use detail components to define an assembly.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. In Revit Architecture. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. When you have finished these tutorials. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create.

verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. import a DWG detail. create a reference callout. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If necessary. enter Window Head Detail. scroll until the folder is displayed.rvt. click Drafting View. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. for Name. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. you will create a drafting view. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. and reference a drafting view. 3 In the Scale list.

select Black and White. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 .In the Project Browser. located directly to the left of the drawing area. click Training Files. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1.dwg. 6 In the Colors field list. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. The model zooms out. 10 In the drawing area. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. and click Open. The drawing area is still blank.). NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. displaying the extents of the detail. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 9 Type ZR. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. as shown.

The view displays to the specified area. click Callout. to activate the view selection list. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. and in the Scale list. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 14 In the drawing area. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. in the Type Selector. select Detail View: Detail. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Reference other view.

linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. double-click the reference callout tag head. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you will create a detail view defined by a callout.rvt. and in the Scale list. in the Type Selector. select Detail View: Detail. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 31 .The reference callout is created. 2 On the Options Bar. select Callout. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 3 In the drawing area. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. c_express_workshop_details_start. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. adjust the detail view display settings.

under Detail Views (Detail). for Name. 4 Right-click Detail 0. 5 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. double-click Wall Base 1. under Detail Views(Detail). enter Wall Base 1. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click Rename. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. click Modify to clear the selection. 8 On the Design Bar. 6 In the drawing area.

10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. bordered by a solid line. This is the view crop region.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 33 .

13 On the View Control Bar. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. The model elements in the view display as half-tones.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. under Graphics. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Click OK. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. click (Hide Crop Region). and click OK. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . for Display Model. 14 In the drawing area. and click View Properties. right-click. select As Underlay.

Model-Based Detailing | 35 . you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly.Brick on Mtl. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. If the crop region is enlarged.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. on the Options Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. click Detail Components. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. Directly above the drawing area. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. Stud. typical details can easily be placed. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . type 1' 6''. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. By grouping detail components. and press ENTER. 20 In the drawing area.

and click Create Instance. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. expand Groups ➤ Detail. add the following detail components as shown. 25 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. as shown.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 23 Using the same method.

28 Press ESC to end the command. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.4" Slab detail. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .

The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail.rvt. special notes. You can customize this list. or instructions within a construction documentation package. click Browse. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. For more information about customizing a keynote database. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. and verify that Horizontal. 4 On the Options Bar. for Full Path. and under Keynote Table. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. c_express_workshop_details_start. click Keynote ➤ Element. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. map keynotes by material. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. In the next exercise. Leader. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. in the type selector. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. and Free End are selected. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents.txt. and format keynote styles. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. click Training Files.

use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail.5 In the drawing area. 7 Click to place the leader arm. a question mark displays. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. Either move the text inside. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. 8 Click to place the tag. If no value has been specified. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard .3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Keynoting | 39 .

12 Click to place the leader arm. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 15 Select 07 21 00. You will now change all keynotes to keys only.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. click Keynote ➤ Material. 16 In the drawing area. 13 Click to place the tag. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader.

Select Keynote Tags. Click Check None.Boxed. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . 17 On the Options Bar. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Click OK.All items within the selection display in red. legends. 19 In the Type Selector. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. Only the keynotes remain selected. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values.

Place views on drawing sheets. In this exercise. Update drawing sheet and project information. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. you will create a sheet. update the project information element properties. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. this tutorial uses imperial units only. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. but for training purposes. In this lesson. Add labels to a title block. and modify and update the project sheet title block. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. If necessary. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. In the Project Browser. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. click Training Files. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. 3 Click OK.rvt. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all).Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. scroll until the folder is displayed. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. In Revit Architecture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or in the element properties of the title block.

enter Sections/Details. 9 In the Project Browser.Unnamed. and click Rename. 6 In the Title Block. you can enter ZE to zoom out. Smith and press ENTER. Click OK. enter A602. 5 In the drawing area. roll the wheel. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. For Name. 8 On the Design Bar. right-click A602 . hold down the wheel and drag. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. In this tutorial. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number.4 Type ZR. click Modify to clear the selection. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . To pan. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. 7 Enter K. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. under Sheets(all). Then. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. double-click Checker. To zoom in and out. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command.

The Family Editor opens. For Project Status. 18 On the Options Bar. enter J. 16 Type ZR. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. 13 Click OK. enter Design Development. (Left) is selected. select Text : 1/8''. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Client Name. Smith. 15 In the Options Bar. For Project Name. 17 On the Design Bar. select the title block. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. in the Type Selector. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. 20 Click and type Project Status. click Text. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. Project Sheet Layout | 45 .11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter 4/10/2008.

21 On the Design Bar. click (Load into Project). 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. and click. to add 28 Using the same method. select Label : 3/16''. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. 22 Using the same method. under Category Parameters. click Label. 23 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. 29 On the Design Bar. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . in the Type Selector. and click OK. and verify that (Top) are selected. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. as shown. as shown. click Modify to exit the command. add Project Issue Date parameter.

and under Keynote Table. you will create. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. a viewport displays. select Override parameter values of existing types. click Training Files. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. enter Keynote Legend . 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. and click Yes.txt. to a drawing sheet. for Full Path. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . for Name. Next you will create. click Browse. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. place and modify a keynote legend.Project. representing the view or schedule.30 In the Reload Family dialog. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting.

Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. under Text. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. and click OK. clear Show Headers. double-click A601 . Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. and drag Keynote Legend .Sections/Details. on the Appearance tab. under Sheets (all). The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. 8 In the Project Browser. as shown. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . expand Legends.

Project as shown. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . The keynote legend is visible. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection.

16 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Keynote Legend . and click OK.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. expand Detail Views (Detail). select Filter by sheet. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. and click Properties. 15 In the Project Browser. right-click Keynote Legend . for Filter. at the bottom of the Filter tab. 19 Click OK twice.Sheet. not keynotes. for View Name. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. and click OK. under Legends. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Project. The Keynote Legend is now blank. click Edit. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. as shown. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet.

under Sheets (all). you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. The view title with line displays below the viewport. as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. double-click A0 . 2 In the Project Browser. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . The view remains selected. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet.Title Sheet 1. and then add and update a Drawing list.The keynote legend is automatically updated. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser.

The drawing list remains selected. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. define the information to include in a view title. by default. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. 5 In the Project Browser. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. As part of a construction document set. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. and zoom in on the drawing list. Revit Architecture displays a view title. expand Schedules/Quantities. as shown. You can specify text attributes for view titles. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Press ESC to clear the selection.When you place a view on a sheet. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. 3 In the Type Selector. 6 Type ZR. or omit view titles from sheets. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties.

Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 .Ceiling Plans. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. clear Appears In Drawing List. select A602 . NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. right-click the selected sheets. while pressing SHIFT. and click OK. under Sheets (all). including only sheets that contain views. and click Properties. 8 In the Project Browser.Sections/Details and select A801 . The drawing list display is updated.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. If the grid moves. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. the wall or column will move with it. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. a curtain wall.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. As you develop the building design. a central service core. it is good practice to test the constraints. 57 . you learn how to use parametric design techniques. For example. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model.

construction. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. from the product library. you load any required family type that is not in your project. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. under Create new. with an RVT extension. To create the project file. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. You can access these 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. 2 In the New Project dialog. such as a door or window. In views that display elevation markers. views. levels. The new project opens. select Project. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. click Training Files. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. For this project. After the beginning exercises. 3 Under Template file. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. West.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. and residential. South. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. under Projects. but contains no geometry. verify that the second option is selected. East. you use a template that is provided with the software. In practice. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. In the drawing area in the right pane. you design inside the elevation markers. and click Browse.rte. and settings. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. you will use the default template. The project is stored as a single file. notice four elevation markers. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. click New. Creating the Project In this exercise. and customize the project as necessary. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. 5 Click OK. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building.

7 If necessary. locate the Project Browser. content and building model reports. created by the template.views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. the view you see in the drawing area. NOTE If you create a project without a template. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Two level lines. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. Sheets (all). notice the Legends. and duplicate levels. 13 In the file window. These views are customizable: you can rename them. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. display in the south elevation. Schedules/Quantities. reflected ceiling plan views. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. change their properties. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. Ceiling Plans. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. duplicate them. 10 In the Project Browser. delete. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. and click Training Files. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. sheets. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. Creating the Project | 59 . and Elevations (Building Elevation). Groups. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. Families. and delete them. will be accessible from the Project Browser. such as schedules and legends. then expand Floor Plans. double-click South. as well as change their names. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). heights. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. schedules. expand Views (all). The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. and elevation views created in the project by the template. 14 For File name. enter Revit Retail Building. and other properties. 8 Under Floor Plans. As you design and document your building model. You can add. and families in your project.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. double-click Metric.

to each other. view the Save reminder interval. and on the General tab. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. the other levels move and change with it. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model.rvt) is selected. verify that Project Files (*. When you begin designing. Adding Project Levels on page 60. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. you will want to save your work frequently. After you modify the two default levels. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. so that when one level moves. expand Views (all). You change the names of the 2 default levels. doors. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Click Settings menu ➤ Options. enter 00 Foundation. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 16 Click Save. or constrained.15 For Save as type. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. and windows within the building model. You learn how the levels are locked. and press ENTER. and double-click South.

The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. 5 In the Project Browser. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. and press ENTER. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. and click Basics. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. which should display by default. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. When you add the new level. not all the tabs are visible. view the Design Bar. Adding Project Levels | 61 . The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab.TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. enter 0. By default. and click OK. This is the Options Bar. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. click Level. and press ENTER. and then move it up. right-click. and press ENTER. Next. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. enter -1800. enter 01 Entry Level. 14 Click Plan View Types. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. 13 On the Options Bar. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. If it does not.

Next. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. enter 3750. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels.As you move the cursor. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. click Modify to end the command. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. and enter 02 Level. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. click Level. right-click Level 3. and rename the corresponding views. 25 Click to place the level line.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. you add another level. click Rename. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. using a different option. and press ESC. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. 23 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Project Browser. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. or on the Design Bar. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. 21 In the Project Browser. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 Enter 3750. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. click (Pick Lines). 19 Click OK. 26 Press ESC. If you create a level by copying it. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. and for Offset. and move it slightly upward.

all the levels move. and you can move them independently. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Adding Project Levels | 63 . Creating a Column Grid on page 64.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. If you select a level and click its lock. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. as shown. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. the levels are no longer constrained. Notice that by moving the top level. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise.

and specify the grid line endpoint. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. the column height changes as well. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. 3 On the Options Bar. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. click Modify. When the grid is complete. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. On the Design Bar. In a later exercise. so that if the roof elevation changes. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. In the following exercise. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. select (Draw). under Floor Plans. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. specify a start point for the grid line. Move the cursor up.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. click Grid. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. double-click 00 Foundation. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. enter 7500 mm. Click to place the grid line. and for Offset. for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. click Grid. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . enter 4500 mm. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. Enter A. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. enter 7500 mm. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. Next. and click to place the line. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. and click to place the line. On the Options Bar. On the Options Bar.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble.

as shown. click Grid. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. and specify the grid line endpoint.8 Press ESC. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. On the Options Bar. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. click Grid.

select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. click Dimension. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 22 While pressing CTRL. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 18 On the Design Bar. select grid lines C and 3. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 21 Press ESC twice. click Dimension. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 15 Starting with grid line A. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. click (Aligned).

click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. click Duplicate. 29 In the Name dialog. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. select grid line 5. 31 For End Segments Length. click the value for Center Segment. enter 50mm. and press ESC. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. (Element Properties). At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. click and drag the blue circular grip up. By pinning these central grid lines. click Modify. and press ESC. 26 In the drawing area. The pins are hidden. and click OK. and select grid line A. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. until it is closer to grid line 5. 32 Click OK twice. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. At the left endpoint of the grid line. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. 24 Press ESC.5mm Bubble with Gap. click Modify. click Edit/New. and select None. enter 6. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. If necessary. Two pins display on the grid lines. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. click . until it is closer to grid line A. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases.

select Grid : 6. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 36 On the Design Bar. For Place By.5mm Bubble. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. 37 Select the grid lines again. 35 In the Type Selector. 39 In the Type Selector. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red).34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. click Finish. click Structural Column. select all of the grid lines. select Grid : 6. and in the Type Selector.5mm Bubble with Gap. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The original continuous grid lines are restored. click (Grid Intersection). and press ESC.

lock it. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. Next. and press ENTER. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. click Activate Dimensions. select grid line A. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 47 Enter 9000. double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. click Camera. and unlock it. If it is unlocked. 46 On the Options Bar. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 48 On the Standard toolbar. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. 43 Press ESC. under Floor Plans. for From. select 01 Entry Level. 45 While pressing CTRL. 52 On the Options Bar.

The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. and click to place the target point of the camera. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A.

57 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Beams on page 72. The current view. When you finish adding beams. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. Adding Beams In this exercise. and click Rename. named 3D View 1 by default. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. and click OK. under Views (all). enter To Building. expand 3D Views. In the Rename View dialog. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Right-click 3D View 1. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. displays in bold under 3D Views. and then copy them to subsequent levels.

2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 3 Click the Detail Level icon .Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. select each grid line. 6 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Project Browser. Adding Beams | 73 . under 3D Views. click Beam. view the icons on the View Control Bar. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. click (Create Beam On Grid). double-click 01 Entry Level. the icon on the right side of the scale. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 7 On the Options Bar. The view is currently set to Coarse. The selected grid lines display as red. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. click Finish. under Floor Plans. 8 While pressing CTRL. 4 Click Medium. double-click To Building to view all of the beams.

select 06 Roof. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click Select All Instances.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. press and hold SHIFT. and click OK. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. double-click 01 Entry Level. select 02 Level. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. 14 Select one of the beams. under Floor Plans. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. click Modify. click (Default 3D View). 17 In the Select Levels dialog. 12 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. right-click. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns.

and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. and click Element Properties. view the Top Level parameter. double-click To Building. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. (Element Properties). 06 Roof. When you created the columns. All of the columns display as red. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. resize the view to see the entire structure. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. click 24 Press ESC. select 06 Roof. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level.to the 5th level. right-click. for Top Level. and if necessary. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. under Instance Parameters. under Constraints. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Beams | 75 . right-click. 21 With the column selected. 25 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Options Bar. 20 Click Cancel. and click Select All Instances.

You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. under Elevations. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. double-click South. 28 Save the drawing. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. as lines only. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. but you want to display them in less detail.

Adding Braces | 77 . Adding Braces In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Braces on page 77. under Floor Plans. To better add the braces to the structure. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. click Framing Elevation. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. and press ESC to end the command. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure.29 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click 00 Foundation. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. you create 8 framing elevation views.

The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). 11 Using the same technique. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. and when the endpoint snap displays. click to specify the start point of the brace. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . but when placed the braces are placed. double-click the elevation marker arrow. 8 In the Type Selector. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. The associated framing elevation view displays. press ESC twice. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. After you add the final brace. 7 On the Design Bar. click Brace. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B.

Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. and press ENTER. delete it and redraw it. The height of the roof lowers. Adding Braces | 79 . Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. enter 18000 mm.

17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. but this time add them from right to left. 14 On the Standard toolbar.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and press ENTER. enter 10000 mm. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser.

and click the lock that displays to unlock it. and press ENTER. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. 23 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. enter 12000 mm. and on the Options Bar. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. as shown in the 3D view below. Adding Braces | 81 . 21 Select grid line A. 19 In the Project Browser. click Activate Dimensions. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). under Floor Plans.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. NOTE As you add braces.

and drag it away from the structure. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. double-click South. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. and if necessary. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 29 In the Project Browser. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. under Floor Plans. Creating a Foundation on page 82. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 00 Foundation. 26 In the Project Browser. lock it. beams. 28 On the Standard toolbar. under Elevations. click and roof height. grid size. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. 31 Save the drawing.24 In the Project Browser. Test connectivity of the columns. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground.

The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree.rfa. and expand Structural Foundations. and drag it to the drawing area. In the View Range dialog. for View Range. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. for Level. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. A warning displays. expand Families. The pile cap has been added in the view. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. under View Depth. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Close the warning dialog. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. and how to load specific families into a project. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. Creating a Foundation | 83 . Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. under Extents. and press ESC twice. The foundation pile cap now displays. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). After you load the pile cap family. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. Click OK twice. In the Element Properties dialog.Before you can add the pile caps. select Unlimited. click Edit. and click View Properties.

12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 13 In the Project Browser.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. and click Create Similar. press ESC twice. under 3D Views. When the final pile cap is placed.

Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. you change the types of the columns. and braces that you used to create the building structure.rvt. click Training Files. All columns in the building model display as red. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. You load new column.14 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select All Instances. 2 Select one of the columns. beams. and brace families into the project. under 3D Views. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click. beam. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. double-click {3D}.

6X15. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. The brace type changes. for Type. This not the size that you want to use. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. click (Element Properties).5CHS. 17 While pressing CTRL. 15 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click OK. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. The building model displays the round hollow columns. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar.9. enter 75mm. right-click. click Modify. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and changing its size parameter. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. 4 On the Design Bar. but it is the only size of its type currently available. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. under Dimensions. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. and click Select All Instances. click Duplicate. click Brace. click Edit/New. 10 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). select the braces in the elevation one by one.2X101. 18 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. In the following steps.3 In the Type Selector. double-click Elevation 1-a. 19 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Type Selector. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. for d. enter 75mm. the braces as well as the beams change. you change the brace type. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 7 On the Design Bar. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. 13 In the Name dialog.

Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. and click Open. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. 3 Under Positioning. select m_RRB_structure_complete. select Auto . Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit.rvt.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Linking the Structural Model on page 87.rvt. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. After the files are linked.Origin to Origin. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. click Training Files.

click Copy. After the link is established. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. structural members. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. select the linked Revit model. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. Grids. 8 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Tools toolbar. and walls could also be copy/monitored. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. while pressing CTRL. however. under Elevations.4 In the Project Browser. 9 In the drawing area. select Levels 00 through 06. 6 In the drawing area. and click Select Link. depending on the project. In this case. click (Copy/Monitor). The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. double-click South. select Multiple. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model.

and click Delete. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. right-click Level 1. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. delete the Level 2 floor plan. while pressing SHIFT. First. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. 16 Click OK. under Floor Plans. for Floor Plan views. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. 13 On the Design Bar. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Finish. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. click OK. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . click Finish mode. 15 In the New Plan dialog.10 On the Options Bar. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Using the same method.

under Floor Plans. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. 20 In the drawing area. for Name. 26 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. 25 In the View Templates dialog. select the Topography : Surface. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. right-click. 24 In the New View Template dialog. 21 In the drawing area. click OK. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View.19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter Floor Plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. right-click. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. under Floor Plans. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . and click OK. select Floor Plans. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. under Names. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 34 In the 3D view that displays. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Site.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.

Adding Floors on page 92.rvt. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .35 In the Project Browser. stairs. expand 3D Views. and click OK. and click Rename. right-click 3D View 1. 36 In the Rename View dialog. To create floors. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding Floors In this exercise. and railings are also created from sketches. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. such as roofs. Some other Revit Architecture elements. enter To Building. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building.

2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. If the grid changes size. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. click Lines. under Floor Plans. select the top floor line. click Floor. Do not lock the dimension. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. Move the cursor to the left. and then the first horizontal grid line. On the Sketch tab. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. double-click 01 Entry Level. Adding Floors | 93 . click (Rectangle). Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. click Dimension. Leave this dimension unlocked. You are now in the Sketch Editor. At the top left corner of the grid. and elements in the current view display as gray. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. past the first vertical grid line.

select the top floor line. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Finish Sketch to create the floor. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. At the top left corner of the grid. press ENTER. and then press ESC. and change their values to 300 mm. Enter 300.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Move the cursor to the left dimension. Select and lock the dimensions. click Modify. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. Do not lock the dimensions. They display on the floor sketch. and click the temporary dimension value. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300.

The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. on the Design Bar. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. click (Pick Lines). and lock the dimensions. and on the Options Bar. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. and for Offset. enter 1500mm. On the Options Bar. double-click 02 Level. and press ESC. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. On the Sketch tab. Select the three remaining floor lines.8 Select the floor. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. click Edit. click Floor. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. using a different sketching technique. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. Next. under Floor Plans. click Quit Sketch. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. Adding Floors | 95 . you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. click Lines.

click Floor. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. The 02 Level floor displays. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. click (Align). 14 On the Design Bar. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 20 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. double-click 03 Level. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. click (Rectangle). and a lock icon displays. under Floor Plans. Click the locks to constrain the floors. click Lines. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 17 On the Sketch tab. 18 On the Options Bar. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor.

click Edit. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. 35 On the Sketch tab. under Views ➤ 3D Views. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. and lock the edges. double-click {3D}. select 05 Roof Garden. click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. 32 Select the floor. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 30 In the Select Levels dialog.24 On the Design Bar. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. Alternatively. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 31 In the Project Browser. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. Adding Floors | 97 .

click to place the roof line. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. double-click 06 Roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ For Offset. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Roof on page 98. click Lines. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. and press ENTER. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. enter 1800 mm. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. click Training Files. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab.rvt. Click (Pick Lines). Adding a Roof In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To create the roof. When a blue dashed line displays.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under Floor Plans.

6 Select grid line 5. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). Adding a Roof | 99 . for Offset. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. click to place the roof line. and when the blue dashed line displays. enter 300 mm. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). 7 On the Options Bar.

Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. select the roof. click Finish Roof. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Trim/Extend). and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. ■ 12 On the Design Bar.10 Press ESC.

14 On the Options Bar. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. and click to specify the section. click Section. move the cursor down below the roof. 17 On the Design Bar. click (Add new points to the slab shape). click Modify. 15 On the Options Bar. enter -100 mm. and press ENTER. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. on grid D. Adding a Roof | 101 . 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. for Elevation. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof.

click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). 30 Click OK 3 times. under Floor Plans. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. under Construction. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit.20 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. click Modify. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. for Structure. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. and on the Options Bar. select the roof. 24 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. for Structure [1]. In section. (Element Properties). select Variable. double-click 06 Roof.

38 In the 3D view. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. zoom in to the roof. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. In this case. select the section line. 40 In the Type Selector. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. select Fascia : Fascia . click Modify. moving counter-clockwise. 41 Starting with the left front edge. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select each edge. and press DELETE. click OK. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.Roof Edge. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. Adding a Roof | 103 . click (Default 3D View). on the View Control Bar. 33 In the warning dialog.31 On the Design Bar. 37 If necessary.

under 3D Views. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . the curtain wall resizes with it. double-click To Building.42 On the Design Bar. so if you resize the grid. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. click Modify. you add a curtain wall.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The type is saved in the project. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click 01 Entry Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Offset. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 05 Roof Garden. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . click Wall. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. enter 1050 mm. and click OK. enter 600 mm. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Under Construction. enter Retail Storefront. For Height. for Join Condition. 6 In the Name dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). For Level. click to place the first curtain wall segment. under Floor Plans. select 01 Entry Level. click Duplicate. for Spacing. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. enter 2100 mm. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Click OK twice. for Spacing. When you duplicate a type. click Edit/New. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. and move it slightly toward the building interior. for Type.rvt. 3 In the Type Selector.

15 On the View Control Bar. double-click To Building. If the grid moves. you can delete the dimensions. If you want to hide them. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and lock the dimensions. and trim each curtain wall segment. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. These dimensions are not in a sketch.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. under 3D Views. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. 13 On the Design Bar. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Trim/Extend). but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. click Dimension. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. so they remain in the view.

You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. click Training Files. Creating an Entrance on page 107. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating an Entrance | 107 . Creating an Entrance In this exercise.rvt.

5 Under Visibility. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. 4 On the Model Categories tab. 2 On the View Control Bar. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. under Views (all). click Detail Level ➤ Medium. under the element list. as these usually represent internal pilasters. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. clear one element to clear all the elements. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. All the elements in the list are selected.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. Do not select Columns. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . To better work with the curtain wall panels. and click None. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 7 Click OK. and double-click South. click All. 6 Under Visibility.

15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. 10 Select 1 panel. 12 With the panels selected. select System Panel : Solid. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. 18 On the View Control Bar. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. select Architectural Elevation. in the Type Selector. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. click Modify. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. and click OK.9 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Project Browser. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 16 On the View Control Bar. press and hold CTRL. in this case an architectural elevation. under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Creating an Entrance | 109 . double-click {3D}.

double-click To Building.19 In the Project Browser. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 Zoom to the front of the building. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under 3D Views. 20 In the Project Browser. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. double-click South.

select One Segment. 24 On the Options Bar. select another mullion to the right. and unpin it. 30 On the Design Bar. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 32 In the Type Selector. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. Creating an Entrance | 111 . 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. click Curtain Grid. and click to select it. click Add or Remove Segments. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 27 On the Options Bar. click Modify.

112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 34 On the View toolbar. press TAB until it is selected.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. select it. click (Default 3D View). 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. and unpin it. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. and view the new entrance.

Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. open the North elevation. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 .38 Press DELETE. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. 40 Optionally. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 3rd. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 39 Using the same process. and 4th panels.

2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Graphics. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 Right-click in the view. 5 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.rvt. select 02 Level. double-click 01 Entry Level. for Underlay.

and click OK. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. and click Rename. which indicates you must draw the callout. and click to complete the callout. under Floor Plans. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 9 In the Project Browser. select the grip closest to the callout head. The cursor changes to a pencil. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 8 Select the callout. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . click Callout.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Display Area. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column.

13 Select the section line. 12 Draw a section line. and click Flip Section. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. click Section. 14 Press ESC. as shown. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 Select the section box. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . right-click.

20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. 18 In the Rename View dialog. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). select Finish Face: Exterior. expand Sections (Building Section). Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 1. and click Rename. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. for Prefer. 26 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector.17 In the Project Browser. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 .135mm Partition (2-hr). click Dimension. and click OK. under Floor Plans. click (Align). Lock both alignments. For Loc Line. select Wall faces. 27 On the Options Bar. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. double-click 01 Entry Level. 24 On the Tools toolbar. enter Section Display Area. select Basic Wall : Interior . 25 Press ESC twice. Click (Rectangle).

select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 38 On the View Control Bar. 32 In the Type Selector. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. and lock the dimension. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. double-click Section Display Area.) 36 Press ESC twice. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. Next. and lock the dimension. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Sections (Building Section). 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. under Ceiling Plans. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. click Ceiling. 37 In the Project Browser.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

click (Element Properties). 46 Press ESC. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . enter 2700 mm. for Base Offset. and click to select the walls. and click (Element Properties). under Constraints. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. press TAB until you select the wall chain. double-click 01 Entry Level. 47 In the Project Browser. enter 2700 mm. under Sections. click to select it. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. Select the 02 Level Floor. and press ESC. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. under Constraints. 41 On the Options Bar. and click to select the walls. click Attach. 43 On the Design Bar. double-click Section Display Area. and click OK. click Modify. for Top/Base. under Ceiling Plans. for Height Offset From Level. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. 45 In the Element Properties dialog.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. view the ceiling structure. under Ceiling Plans. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. click Cancel. under Construction. for Type.49 In the Project Browser. for Structure. double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Rotate). 55 In the Type Properties dialog. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Cancel. and click . 54 Click OK. click Edit. 58 On the Edit toolbar. click Edit/New. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling.

61 Press ESC.60 Click. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. and press ENTER. enter 45.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 64 On the View Control Bar. 66 Optionally. 65 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows Off.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. click Shadows On. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123.

rvt. enter 1500 mm. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and click to create a reference plane to the right. under Floor Plans. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. and copy it to the 05 Level. double-click 01 Entry Level. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. click Ref Plane. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Move the cursor over grid line B. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. and click to create a reference plane to the left. and for Offset.

shorten the right reference plane. C. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 6 Select the left reference plane. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. click Stairs. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. click Modify. and 3. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 2. 7 Using the same method.5 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

10 On the Options Bar. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. The complete stair displays. and select the 2nd reference plane. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. beyond the end of the stair. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . select Basic Wall : Generic .■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. and specify a point. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. click Wall.225mm Masonry. Move the cursor down. Click (Rectangle). select Finish Face: Interior. 12 In the Type Selector. including its handrails. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line.

for Prefer. Click Modify. and lock the alignment. select the dimension value. 18 Using the same technique. click Align. Select the wall. and click to select it. and specify a point away from the wall. select Wall faces. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Select the bottom of the stair. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. Lock the dimension. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing.15 On the Tools toolbar. enter 1200 mm. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. Select the interior face of the wall. click Dimension. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER.

TIP To flip the door swing. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . (Undo). select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. select both reference planes. 23 Select the stair. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. a warning displays. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. 28 On the Options Bar. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. 27 In the Type Selector. 24 On the Standard toolbar.21 Select the dimension. clear Tag on Placement. 25 While pressing CTRL. The stair and walls move to the left. and press DELETE. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. click Door. and press DELETE. Because the dimension is constrained. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints.

click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. click 36 On the View toolbar. Click OK. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw).30 On the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. 35 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). click Align. for Multistory Top Level. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. Under Constraints. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. select all 4 walls. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). for Base Constraint. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. Click OK. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For Top Constraint. 44 On the Tools toolbar. and move the cursor to spin the building model. but if you view the top level of the building. (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. (Rectangle). 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. (Element Properties). select 00 Foundation. 33 Select the stair. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. click Modify. select 05 Roof Garden.

48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. click see the roof. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. and lock the alignments. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . and lock the alignment. (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View). on the View toolbar. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click OK. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar.

61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. click 59 On the View toolbar. for Base Offset. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. Under Constraints. (Default 3D View).55 In the Project Browser. By offsetting the base. 56 Select the shaft. enter 300 mm. (SteeringWheels). The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). and click OK. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. For Top Constraint.

2 Right-click in the view. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Underlay. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties.rvt. select 06 Roof. click Training Files. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. under Graphics. under Floor Plans. click Wall.

9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. 16 On the Design Bar. click Edit Profile. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 11 In the Go To View dialog. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. and click Open View. 7 On the Tools toolbar. and on the Options Bar. click (Align). click Lines. and click (Fillet arc). 15 In the error dialog. select Elevation: South. click . 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. The exact placement is not important. enter 9750.225mm Masonry. select Basic Wall : Generic . 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. and press ENTER. and then select the right face of the wall.5 In the Type Selector. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 17 On the Options Bar. click Remove Constraints.

select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. click . under 3D Views. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . double-click {3D}. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. click Finish Sketch. 22 In the Project Browser. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. and click (Circle). 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar.

and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building.

under Floor Plans. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. click Component.5 Meters. select M_RPC Tree . 3 In the Type Selector. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Type Selector.rvt. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. as shown.4. click Component. 5 On the Basics tab. between grid lines C and D. double-click 05 Roof Garden. TIP After you place the 1st planter. and press ESC twice. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . and open Metric\m_RRB_host. click Training Files.

click Duplicate. 18 In the Project Browser.8 On the View toolbar. enter 2400 mm. double-click 01 Entry Level. 21 On the Design Bar. click Floor. under Floor Plans. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. double-click 05 Roof Garden. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. click Edit/New. and then click OK twice. and on the Options Bar. enter 1500 mm. 14 In the Name dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. View the roof. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 17 While pressing CTRL. for Height. 11 Select one of the trees. click (Default 3D View). click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and in the Type Selector. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. as shown. for Type. For Offset. 16 Click Apply. select M_RPC Tree . 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. and click OK.5 Meters. 10 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click Lines. select the 2 remaining trees. double-click {3D}. under Floor Plans. under Dimensions. enter Japanese Cherry 1. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser.5 Meters. (Element Properties).

and click to sketch a line. click (Draw). 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . for Offset. enter 0 mm. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. 25 Using the same method. 29 On the Options Bar. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. and click to sketch a line. and click to place the line. 26 On the Options Bar.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B.

35 Select the line that you just drew. clear Chain. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5.30 On the Options Bar. and click to finish the line. and click to finish the line. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 32 Press ESC. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. click (Trim/Extend). and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. move the cursor up 900 mm.

create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape.38 On the Design Bar. Next. click Finish Sketch. 45 Click OK. 42 In the Name dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. a photorealistic image displays. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. When you render an image. In plan view. click Edit/New. for Type. select M_RPC Male : Alex. near Column E5. 48 In the Type Selector. The completed sidewalk displays. select Rotate after placement. and click so he is facing the column. enter Sidewalk. 39 Select the sidewalk. under Constraints. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. 43 Click OK twice. enter -250 mm. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. click Duplicate. for Height Offset from Level. as shown: (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. 49 On the Options Bar. click Component. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog.

and click (Element Properties). 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. 52 In the Type Selector. about 30 degrees. select M_RPC Beetle. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 56 Press ESC twice. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). and click to place her on the sidewalk. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 54 In the Type Selector. and place it along the sidewalk behind him.NOTE If necessary. click Camera. click the car.

Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . under Constraints. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. 63 Click the sidewalk.59 In the Element Properties dialog. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. and click OK. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. If the sidewalk changes height. click Pick Host. 64 Select Alex. 65 Click the sidewalk. click Pick Host. under 3D Views. double-click To Building. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. 60 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 66 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. for Offset. When you select a host for a component. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. Next. enter -300 mm. and on the Options Bar. double-click West.

you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. After the service core is positioned. and replace them with a service core. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View). you delete the entire stairwell. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. walls. and shaft opening. 3 Select the entire stairwell. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click 6 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . including the stairs. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. 4 Press DELETE.

13 In the drawing area. and zoom in to the linked instance.rvt. and click Create Instance. 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. expand Groups.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 10 In the Project Browser. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and notice that the linked file is listed. click OK. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. expand Model. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and on the Design Bar. click (Align). 11 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. click Training Files. right-click m_RRB_core. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 01 Entry Level.

(Default 3D View). click Ungroup. 17 On the Design Bar. click 21 On the View toolbar. or if the group layout is expected to change. and click to align the center. 18 Select the core. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . (SteeringWheels). NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. and on the Options Bar. ■ ■ Click grid line C. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. click Modify. 20 On the View toolbar. click (top down view).16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms.

you add glass railings around the floor edges.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. After you modify it. where it is hosted within a railing family. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise.rvt. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_.

9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 8 In the Project Browser. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. under Floor Plans. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . and on the Options Bar. press and hold CTRL. click Training Files. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. in the Project Browser. click OK. 13 On the Tools toolbar. The floor sketch displays. 5 Expand Railing. expand Families. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. and select Glass. expand Renderings. click (Split). click Edit. 3 In the Conference project. The rendering displays. and open Metric\m_Conference. and Parapet. Handrail only. and double-click Lounge Perspective. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. and expand Railings. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. and click to split the floor. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays.rvt.rvt. double-click 02 Level.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. click (Align). 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. and click to draw another line. and on the Options Bar. 25 Select grid line B. and click to draw another line. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 23 Complete the sketch as shown.15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Lines. verify that Chain is not selected. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. and click to place it.

click (Align). 34 In the Element Properties dialog. and lock the alignment. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 31 In the Revit dialog. click Dimension.26 Select grid line D. 30 On the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor.rvt project. For Offset. click Finish Sketch. and click the lock to lock the alignment. Lock the dimensions. 29 On the Design Bar. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Railing Properties. and click OK. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click Railing. enter 100 mm. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. 33 On the Design Bar. select Glass. 27 On the Tools toolbar. for Type. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 .

click Camera. 39 Click Finish Sketch. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. click Dimension.37 On the Design Bar. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

You can view the railing that you just added. Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 .

43 Close all project drawings. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. 153 . the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. NOTE For training purposes.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. lofty ceilings. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. exterior fire stairs. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. and a roof garden. slight modifications to the building design have been made. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. balconies.

154 .

You learn how to create new views from existing views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. section. elevation. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. you learn how to create views from a building model. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. 155 . You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. including plan. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. how to create section and elevation views.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.

right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 9 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . and click OK. 7 In the Project Browser.2 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. and click OK.

12 In the Rename View dialog. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 13 In the Project Browser. 11 Under Floor Plans. click the current scale. and click OK. enter Vicinity Plan. 14 On the View Control Bar.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Vicinity Plan. and click 1: 1000. Next.

17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 16 Right-click.rvt. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. select Elevation: Building Elevation. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. for Scale. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select 1:100.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. click Elevation.rvt. 3 In the Type Selector.

and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . click Modify. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar.

15 On the Options Bar. enter South East. under Elevations. double-click South East. for Scale. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 11 In the Project Browser.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. select 1:100. and double-click Level 1. 10 In the Rename View dialog. click Section. 14 In the Type Selector. select Section: Building Section. expand Floor Plans. ■ Move the cursor down. and click OK. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3.

18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 .Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building.

164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. Click the midpoint of the section line. click Split Segment.

View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 23 On the View Control Bar. 24 Select gridline F. and double-click Section 1. using the blue circular drag grip. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. expand Sections (Building Section).21 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. click Modify.25 On the Design Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. To create each view.

4 On the Options Bar.Resulting callout view . select Floor Plan. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair.rvt. click Callout. Creating Callout Views | 167 . under Floor Plans. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. select 1:50. double-click Level 1. for Scale. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 3 In the Type Selector. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. ■ Select the middle grip. and select the callout boundary.

click Modify. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. select 1:50.7 On the Design Bar. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. double-click Section 1. select Detail View: Detail. Creating Callout Views | 169 . enter Enlarged Stair Plan. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. and click OK. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. for Scale. click Callout. 9 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Building Sections). 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Modify the callout leader as shown.■ Move the cursor diagonally down. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.

and click OK. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. under Detail Views (Details). Creating Callout Views | 171 . Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 18 In the Rename View dialog. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename.17 In the Project Browser.

and click Open. the elevation markers.rvt. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. under Floor Plans. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . open Metric\Families\Annotations. You change the appearance of the section mark head. select Custom-Section Head.rfa. double-click Level 1. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Training Files. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.

19 Click OK. 10 On the floor plan. click Duplicate. select Section Head . 12 For Section Tag. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. . Section Tail . and select 2. enter 12. and click OK. select the current project. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 17 Under Category. and select 3. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. click Load into Project. and can be applied to the section line. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. clear any others. click the Annotation Objects tab. and click OK.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. On the floor plan. and click OK. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . 14 In the Object Styles dialog.Filled.Custom. click Duplicate. for Section Head. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. click Edit/New. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. Section Tail – Filled. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. enter Section Head – Custom. scroll to Section Line. select the section line. scroll to Section Marks.5mm Square. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 4 On the Design Bar. 15 Under Category. 8 In the Name dialog. 22 In the Name dialog.

30 On the Design Bar. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. For Line Weight. click Edit/New.5mm Square. 34 In the Name dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 39 Click OK twice. On the floor plan. 40 Press ESC. Click OK. enter 6 mm. click Edit/New. click Load into Project. open Metric\Families\Annotations.23 In the Type Properties dialog.5 mm. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. select Square. 36 In the drawing. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 Click OK twice.rfa. click Training Files. notice the square elevation markers that display. Click OK. . click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. For Dimensions ➤ Width. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. and on the Options Bar. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. select Custom-Callout Head. select the current project. clear all others. . 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Open. enter 12. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. and click OK. For Corner Radius. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select 3. click Duplicate. select 12. for Callout Tag. and on the Options Bar. for Elevation Tag. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. select the callout.

view regions. 49 Click OK. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. filters. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. scroll down to Callout Boundary. select Dash.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 43 Under Category. expand Callout Boundary. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 46 Under Category. You learn to create view templates. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. 45 For Line Pattern. and select 4. click the Annotation Objects tab. masking regions. and select 7. and visual overrides. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson.

and double-click East. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. click (Hide Crop Region). 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. 5 On the View Control Bar. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. under Elevations. The crop region displays as red. 2 On the View Control Bar. To accomplish this. click Training Files. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings.Creating a View Template In this exercise. and apply it to multiple elevation views. 6 On the View Toolbar.rvt. click (Show Crop Region). In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Zoom to Fit. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown.

13 On the View Control bar. Callouts. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. Creating a View Template | 177 . under Visibility. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. levels. elevation markers. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. clear Entourage. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. grids. 11 Under Visibility. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

double-click North.rvt. and click OK. and click Create View Template From View. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 18 In the Project Browser. 20 Using the same method. right-click North. right-click East. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 15 In the New View Template dialog. click Apply. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Apply View Template. click OK. under Elevations. and click OK. 16 In the View Templates dialog. edit the crop region as before.14 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 17 In the Project Browser.

under Extents. click Edit. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. for Bottom. select Penthouse. and click Properties.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. select Level Below (Level 4). NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. right-click. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. for View Range. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for Level. select Level Below (Level 4). you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . Under View Depth. Click OK twice. double-click Penthouse. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views.

Under View Depth. for View Range. click Edit.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. for Bottom. and click Properties. Click OK twice. select Roof Plan. under Extents. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 6 In the Project Browser. for Level. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Level 4. right-click. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level 4. under Floor Plans. double-click Roof Plan.

15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Bottom. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. click Plan Region. Move you cursor diagonally. 13 On the Design Bar. Click OK twice.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. select Unlimited. 11 On the Options Bar. for View Range. for Level. click Region Properties. under Extents. 16 On the Design Bar. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click Lines. Under View Depth. 10 On the Design Bar. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . click Edit. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. select Unlimited. click Finish Sketch. In the left corner of the building.

3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. the fire rating of the walls. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser.17 On the Design Bar. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. click Modify. under Views (all). 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click the Filters tab. and double-click Level 1. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. After you apply the filter. in this case. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly.

click (New). and click OK. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 5 In the Filters dialog. for Rated Walls. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. and click OK. under Categories. 12 On the Filter tab. enter Rated Walls. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click OK. Select contains. 14 In the Color dialog. and click OK. under Filters. for Color. click Add. select Fire Rating. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. and apply a color. click <No Override>. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 17 Using the same method. 11 Select Rated Walls. 16 Click OK. click Override under Patterns. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. select Solid Fill. select the red color. 7 In the Filters dialog. click Remove. select Walls. 9 Click OK. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. click Edit/New. Enter Hr. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . for Pattern. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. under Projection/Surface. 10 On the Filter tab. and click OK. under Basic colors.

Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To accomplish this. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you obscure geometry in portions of a view.

2 Select Copy of Level 1. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. and click OK. 7 On the View menu. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. and click Rename. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Masking Region. as shown. 8 Select the crop region. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Show Crop Region. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu.rvt. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. select Invisible lines. under Floor Plans.

12 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click Finish Sketch.

and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. under Pattern Overrides. select Walls. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click the current scale. 7 Under Cut. under Floor Plans. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click. under Visibility. and click 1: 50. click <No Override> to apply a color. right-click Unit 18 Plan . for Pattern. click black. and click Rename. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. select Solid fill. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.rvt. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. and click OK. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. 11 Click OK twice. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. for Color. 4 On the View Control Bar.Level 1.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click Override. click in the Patterns field. right-click. 1 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. under Visibility. clear Floors. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Grids.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Modify. 16 Under Visibility.

18 Right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.

the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. By using the previous method to make the selection. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. click <No Override> to apply a color. click Override. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Pattern. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Lines. for Color. click Projection Lines. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 21 Under Projection/Surface. and click OK. select the sofa. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 25 Click OK twice.20 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. select Dash. right-click. click a purple color. 23 In the Color dialog.

and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. click By Category Override. click Modify. select a bright green color. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 29 In the Color dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. 32 Select one of the lamps.28 For Color. right-click. click . The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. and click OK twice.

33 On the View Control Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. how to add views to the sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. click . and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project.

The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. click Training Files. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. and click OK.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. and click View. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. right-click.Creating Sheets. select A0 metric.

on the Options Bar. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. 5 When the title block highlights. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 3 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . enter A101. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). Click OK. click Modify. expand Sheets (all). and select the title block. 7 On the Design Bar. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. enter Site Plan. For Sheet Number. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved.Unnamed. For Sheet Name.

Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . 14 Click OK. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Project Number. for Project Address. enter J. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. click Edit. The new project information displays in the titleblock. For Client Name. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 2009-1. For Project Status. enter 15 May. Smith. MA 12345 12 Click OK. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. 2009.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. For Project Name. under Other. enter For Approval.

and click OK. and click Save.Elevations A107 . 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. right-click. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .Layout Plan A104 . you add views to these sheets.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Elevations A105 . and click OK.Elevations A106 .Sections A108 . for Name. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.rvt. select the new sheet name.Stairs In the following exercise. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Rename. 17 In the Project Browser. select A0 metric. enter Floor Plan.

double-click A104 . under Sheets (all). Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser.Floor Plan. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. 4 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click A102 . and click to place the view. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. select Level 1. The red border around the view no longer displays. 2 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. click Modify. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Floor Plans.rvt. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 .Elevations. under Sheets (all). 6 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify.Sections.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all). and click to place it. double-click A107 . 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). click Modify. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. 12 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. align it with the East elevation.

and press TAB until it highlights. select 1:5. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. for View Scale. 16 Select title bar. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . . click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. move the cursor over it. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. zoom in to the grip. and on the Options Bar. and click OK.

and click to place it. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. under Sheets (all). under Floor Plans. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. 21 Zoom to the stair callout.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser.Stairs. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click A108 . double-click Level 1. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 18 Under Floor Plans.

4 Double-click the Roof elevation height.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. you must first activate the view on the sheet. double-click A107 . right-click. In order to do this. and press ENTER. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Sheets (all). Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. and then make changes and deactivate the view. enter 16700 mm. 2 Select the building section view. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level.Sections. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. and click Activate View. click Modify. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 In the Project Browser. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and click Deactivate View. double-click North.6 Right-click. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Elevations (Building Elevation). as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. After you create the sheet. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. You modify the view to hide the view title.

under Floor Plans. 7 Place the camera as shown. right-click. 3 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. and click OK. select the new sheet name. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. enter Title Sheet. For Sheet Name. double-click Level 1. enter T. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. select A0 metric. and click Properties.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The camera view displays. click Camera.

For Far Clip Offset. For Target Elevation. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. Under Extents.8 On the Options Bar. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. select Far Clip Active. under Sheets (all). 11 On the View Control Bar. enter 1500 mm. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. double-click T . click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. enter 100000 mm.Title Sheet. Under Camera. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. for Eye Elevation. 13 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View Control Bar. 14 Under 3D Views. Click OK. enter 18000 mm. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .

23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . select Scale (locked proportions). on the Options Bar. under Graphics.15 With the view selected. 24 Click OK twice. and click OK. select No. 19 Select the view on the sheet. enter 635 mm. Under Model Crop Size. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 22 In the Name dialog. Click Apply. 25 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. click Duplicate. . for Show title. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. enter Viewport/no title mark. click Size. click Modify. click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. for Height. and on the Options Bar. and then click OK.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and close the exercise file.

expand Floor Plans. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. 207 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. such as doors and windows. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects.Level 1. Tagging Objects In this lesson. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.rvt. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. Because of the open style floor plan. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as room and window schedules. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. You also learn to create different types of schedules.

and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). and click Room and Area. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. move the cursor to the right. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. click Room Separation. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. as shown: 5 Using the same method.

Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. 7 On the Design Bar.6 Using the same method. 9 In the Tags dialog. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . click Modify. click Load.

click Modify. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. click Training Files. 14 For Offset. click OK. verify that Tag on placement is selected. The room tag number displays in blue.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and the rectangle contains the room tag. indicating that it can be edited. click Room.rfa. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type U18-1. 13 On the Options Bar. type 2400 mm. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. and click to place the room and tag. click it. and select the room tag. and press ENTER. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 16 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Tags dialog.

19 On the Design Bar. click Room. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. Dining. 22 Click the room text label. click Modify. Sequential letters are also supported. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 23 Using the same method.18 Click the room text label. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. type Kitchen. Click to place the new room and tag. click Modify. place rooms and tags. type Entry. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . and press ENTER.

expand Lines. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair).Level 2. 27 On the Design Bar. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. double-click Unit 18 Plan . but they need to be tagged. on the Model Categories tab. under Floor Plans. 29 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Modify. clear Room Separation. and moving clockwise. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The rooms are already placed. click Room Tag.

Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. you learn how to place door and window tags.rvt.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Tag ➤ By Category. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. expand Floor Plans. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. in the Project Browser.rvt. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . clear Leader. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. click New. 11 Using the same method. type Corridor. for room 101. type Building Entry. For 104. select Corridor. For 103. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. For 102. next to Rows. For 105. and press ENTER. select Storage. type Storage. and press ENTER. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. for Name.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. The room Number is U17-46. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. 10 Edit the number to be 101. and press ENTER. add 5 more rooms. 101-106.

expand Lines. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and modify room names. 4 Click OK twice. 13 Save the file. and press ENTER. click the Color field. you add room separation lines. click Override. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. type Stair. In the Lines field. under Visibility. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. click the Lines field. select 9. place rooms from a program list. Under Custom colors. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. click the bright green swatch. under Floor Plans. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Projection/Surface. For Weight. double-click Level 1. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. For Room Separation. In the Line Graphics dialog. and click OK.■ For 106.

9 On the Design Bar. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . First. click Room. click Room Separation. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. click Modify. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. draw the horizontal line.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building.

11 On the Options Bar. type 2400 mm. for Room. select 102 Storage. 13 On the Options Bar. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). 14 For Offset.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. select 101 Building Entry. for Room.

16 Using the same method. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. 20 While pressing CTRL. 17 On the Design Bar. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. and zoom in to the Corridor. double-click Room Schedule. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). double-click Level 1. place the following rooms. 19 In the Project Browser. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. under Schedules/Quantities. under Floor Plans. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. click Modify.

27 Select Schedule keys. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Category. type Units. click New. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and for all 3 finishes. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. and click OK. while pressing CTRL. and click Add. 31 For Key Name. type As Selected. (Element Properties). click Schedule/Quantities. click 23 On the Design Bar. select Base Finish. clear Room Bounding.21 On the Options Bar. select Rooms. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Available fields. Floor Finish. 30 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 26 In the New Schedule dialog. under Constraints. click Modify. and Wall Finish. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. for Rows. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 24 Open the Room Schedule.

select Units. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . click (Element Properties). click (Filter Selection). The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. select Room Style. 44 On the Options Bar. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Check None. select Units. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan.32 Using the same method. for Room Style. double-click Level 1. select Rooms. for Fields. 33 In the Project Browser. right-click Room Schedule. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. 38 Under U17-8. for Available fields. under Schedules/Quantities. under Identity Data. and click Properties. 43 In the Filter dialog. 42 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. and click OK. and click Add. and click OK. under Floor Plans. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. click Edit. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 37 Open the Room Schedule. 36 Click OK twice. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 In the Element Properties dialog.

7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. 103. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. right-click Level 1. and 106. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. under Floor Plans. at the warning prompt. select Room Style. click 5 For Title. and click Properties. For rooms 102 and 105. 9 In the Project Browser. click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. and click OK. under Views (all). for Color.46 Open the Room Schedule. type Room Type. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. select Service. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 104. type Room Type. select Public.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 48 Save the file. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). (Duplicate). expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. and apply it to the Level 1 view. under Graphics. click the Color Scheme field. for Name. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

and clear Room Separation. click the value in the Color column.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Click OK twice. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . 19 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select the color legend. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. expand Lines. click Modify. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. clear Visible. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. under Schemes. click Edit Color Scheme. click Edit. under Visibility. select Room Type. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). click Color Scheme Legend.

for Size. select blue. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 30 On the Design Bar. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 28 Under Title Text. under Graphics. on the Options Bar. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. 29 Click OK twice. 23 Using the same method. for Swatch Width. under Custom color. (Element Properties). type 5 mm. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. and click OK. respectively. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog.22 In the Color dialog. type 25 mm. click Modify. 24 Click OK.

and select Properties.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. under Sections. under Visibility. and click OK. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Rooms. for Color Scheme. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. under Sections. click Color Scheme Legend. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 35 Click OK twice. select Room Type. click Edit. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. right-click Building Section. double-click Building Section. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor.

under Identity Data.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). and click OK. select Public. 41 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. 42 In the Filter dialog. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 47 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. select Units. (Filter Selection). 45 While pressing CTRL. select all the rooms in the stairwell. click Check None. and click OK. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 46 Click . select Rooms. click . for Room Style.

49 In the Element Properties dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. type Suites. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. under Identity Data. and click . double-click Room Style Schedule. and click OK.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. 54 While pressing CTRL. click New. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. excluding the stairwell spaces. select Service. for Room Style. for Rows. 51 On the Options Bar. under Key Name for the new row. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4.

The color fill extends to the roof. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. select Suites. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. but not beyond it. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. and click OK. under Identity Data. select Areas and Volumes. select the room on the left side of the top floor. and click OK. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. for Room Style. 59 Under Room Area Computation.55 Click . Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. The color fill will extend to the roof. under Volume Computations. verify that At wall finish is selected. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

71 Click OK. the dining room. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. select Loft. and the living room. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). under Constraints. type 0. 66 Click OK.0. for Upper Limit. 68 Click . . 67 On the first level. 70 For Limit Offset. click Modify. for Upper Limit. type -254 mm. and click 65 For Limit Offset. 72 On the Design Bar. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . select the stairwell room.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. under Constraints. select Level 2.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under 3D Views. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates.rvt. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. double-click {3D}. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser.73 Save the file.

9 Using the same method. under Category. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 4 In the Type Selector. select Material: Description. click Family and Type. 5 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Roofs. For Then by. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select Family and Type. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. Clear Itemize every instance.Insulation on Plywood Deck .EPDM. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 3 While pressing CTRL. and click Add. and click OK. under Available fields. Select Grand totals. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . click Modify. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 .

select Material: Area. under Other. 23 For Field formatting. 19 For Type. select Calculate totals. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.40 50. select Material: Cost. 12 Click OK. under Available fields. click Edit. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. type Estimated Cost. for Material: Cost. for Fields. and click OK twice. click Estimated Cost. and click Properties. 17 Click Calculated Value. select Currency. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. 20 For Formula. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. and click Add. and under Fields. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 21 Click OK. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. click the Formatting tab. Under Field formatting. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Calculate totals.

ensuring consistency across families and projects. either within family components or within the project template. In this lesson. 28 For Unit symbol. and schedule the total distance of each path. for Currency.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. 30 Click OK twice. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. and reporting the shared parameters. you create an exiting plan for the building. 26 In the Project Units dialog. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. adding the shared parameters to a family. you create a shared parameter file. tag the line. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 31 Save the file. 27 In the Format dialog. regardless of category. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. These shared parameters can be added to any family. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. click the Format value. 29 Select Use digit grouping. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. which inserts commas after every three digits. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. and are defined and stored in an external file. can be used for any number-based parameter.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. for Rounding. The cost fields are formatted correctly. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. creating a generic tag to tag the family. select $. You draw a travel path line. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. Digit grouping. not just for currency.

click New.rvt. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click New. for Name. select Length. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 11 Click OK twice. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. type Travel Distance. click Create. for File name.txt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. type Exiting. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. under Floor Plans. under Groups. type OfficeStandardsParameters. click Training Files. and click OK. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click Save. click Training Files. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog.rvt. 7 Under Parameters. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and click OK. 9 Under Parameters. type Path ID. for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Type of Parameter. click New. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Name.

select Shared parameter. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. for Travel Distance Formula. If you have multiple projects open. 11 Click OK. following the equals symbol (=). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Add. 9 In the Family Types dialog. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. under Parameter Data. 15 If necessary. and click Select. 4 In the Family Types dialog. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . Click Training Files. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. under Parameter Type. click Family Types. type Length. and click OK. 3 On the Design Bar.rfa. for Group parameter under. 14 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Family Types dialog. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Load into Projects. under Parameters. and click OK. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. select Constraints. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 13 Click Apply. otherwise the family loads into the current project. under Parameters.rvt. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. click Add. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. group it under Dimensions. under Dimensions. 10 Using the same method. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. in the Load into Projects dialog. 8 Select Instance. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. and select Instance. and click OK. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog.

click Label. click Select. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. click (Add Parameter). click Training Files. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. 24 Click OK twice. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Label. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Category Parameters. select Travel Distance.rft. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. select Travel Distance. under Parameters. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. and click OK. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. click parameter(s) to label).

rvt is selected. and click OK. click Load into Projects. 32 In the Save As dialog. and move it down. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. and click Save.28 On the Design Bar. 29 In the drawing window. 33 On the Design Bar. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. type M_Travel Distance Tag. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . select Path ID. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. for File Name. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. click Modify. and press DELETE.rfa. 35 Save the file.

4 On the Options Bar.Tagging. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 6 Move the cursor to the right. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. select Chain. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. After the lines are tagged. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click in the center of the corridor.Placing. above the exterior door as shown. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. click Component. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. double-click Exiting Plan . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Level 1.rvt.

12 On the Design Bar. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. under Constraints. 8 On the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . move the cursor near the right corner.Level 2. under Floor Plans.Tagging. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. double click Exiting Plan . and click (Element Properties). for Path ID. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 13 While pressing CTRL. type 1-1. verify that Chain is selected.7 Move the cursor down. select the 2 dashed travel lines. clear Leader. click Modify. and click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. Placing. and click outside of the building. through the door. 10 On the Options Bar. click Component. click Tag ➤ By Category. 17 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 23 Move the cursor down. click Modify. and click. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click above the door to the stair. move the cursor to the left. 21 On the Design Bar. and click in the stair. click Component. 20 On the Design Bar.19 Move the cursor up through the door.

33 For Name. click Modify. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. click Modify. . 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Placing.Tagging. for Path ID.24 On the Design Bar. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . 30 Using the same method. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 While pressing CTRL. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. click Tag ➤ By Category. type Level 1 Exit Distance. and click OK. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 27 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Constraints. under Category. type 2-1.

and click Rename. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 38 For Sort by. 44 In the Project Browser. under Other. and under Field formatting. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. 36 For Filter by. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 43 In the Project Browser. for Filter. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. type Level 2 Exit Distance. in the first field. 46 In the Project Browser. for Filter by. select Path ID. 35 Click the Filter tab. while pressing CTRL. 41 Under Fields. type 1-. click Training Files. select Path ID. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Travel Distance.rvt. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. in the second field. 40 Click the Formatting tab. and in the third field. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 49 Click OK twice. select Calculate totals. 50 Save the file. under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 42 Click OK. click Edit. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. type 2-. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. select contains. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. and click Add. under Available fields. and click Properties. in the third field. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Path ID and Travel Distance.

expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. for Assembly Code. under Categories.Fixed Partitions. right-click the Design Bar.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. 9 Click OK twice. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. and click View. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 .Partitions . click the Fields tab. 4 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities.Interiors ➤ C10 . under Identity Data. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . select the following fields.152 mm. right-click Generic .Partitions ➤ C1010100 . 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. expand C . 10 In the schedule. and click Properties. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. select Walls. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. and select C1010145 . click the Value field.

you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. click the File Data Source tab. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. 6 Click Finish. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson.mdb). The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. and click OK to create the database. In the left pane of the Open dialog. type Revit_Project. 3 Click New. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. and click Next. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source.mdb. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. for Database Name. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 9 Under Directories. 11 Click OK 3 times. 8 In the New Database dialog. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. select a location for the database file. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 1 On the File menu. click OK. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. under Database. click Training Files. and click Next. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.rvt.11 Close the exercise file. click Create. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. the database display may be different than that shown.

The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. in addition to the Id column. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. 13 Close the exercise file. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. For example. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . Additionally. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type.

262 .

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. 263 . or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

add detail components. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. 297 . plywood. and metal studs. These components display at the required scale. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. In the callout view. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. In order to detail from the building model. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. like a standard door header condition. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. you trace over the building model geometry.

6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Training Files. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Detail Component. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. and click OK. select As underlay.rvt.rfa. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. which means that all detail components. and click Open. After you add components. Exact location is not important. double-click the detail callout head. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. click Training Files.Detailing the View In this exercise. region objects. They are also view specific. as well as detail lines. 5 In the alert dialog. You load detail components. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the drawing area. The roof overhang detail displays. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. you detail the view of the roof edge. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. and insulation objects.

8 Delete the component. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. select Corrugated Metal. 19 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties). 14 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 10 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. click Modify. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 17 In the drawing area. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Name dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 406. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click Edit/New. 15 For Spacing.5mm. for Pattern ➤ Detail. Detailing the View | 299 . enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click Repeating Detail. 16 Click OK twice.

24 In the Type Selector. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rfa. 22 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ Click Modify. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Training Files. click (Move). and click Open. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. and on the Edit toolbar. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. click Detail Component. click Load. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration.

33 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.Because you still have several components to load. and click Open. press SPACEBAR 3 times. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal.rvt. you load them as a group from a single file. and place it in the detail view as shown. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 31 To properly orient the component. 30 In the Type Selector. click OK. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Detailing the View | 301 . click Training Files. click Detail Component. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point.

The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 37 Click Modify. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select Chain.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. click the Flip instance arrows. and click Modify. 38 Select the horizontal segment. 35 On the Options Bar. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown.

enter 140mm. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. Detailing the View | 303 . as shown. click (Move). Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. click Insulation. ■ Click Modify. For Offset. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. click Detail Component. select to near side. 42 Click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation.

52 Proceed to the next exercise.45 In the Type Selector. as shown. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. 51 Click Modify. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 47 In the Type Selector. and lock the component.rvt. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. 2 In the Type Selector. you add lines to your detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. meaning they display only in this view. click Detail Lines. Like detail components. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. select Thin Lines. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. they are view specific. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

4 Click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 5 Select the vertical plywood component. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 10 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. click Detail Lines. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. and press ENTER. 11 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. For Offset. and press ENTER. enter 10mm. select Thin Lines. 7 In the Type Selector. as shown. enter 10mm. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. For Offset. as shown. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar.

and clear Chain.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. and draw the detail lines as shown. as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. click (Draw). select Chain. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

22 In the Project Browser. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. click Detail Lines. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). select Vapor Barrier. select the Penthouse level line. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. When you turn the display model off. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. and press ENTER. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. select Thin Lines. and click OK. 26 In the Type Selector. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. right-click. select Do not display. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. Click (Pick Lines). 24 On the View Control Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area.18 In the Type Selector. enter 10mm. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. and click Properties. For Offset. draw the detail lines as shown.

34 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it.29 On the Design Bar. 32 Click Modify. press SPACEBAR as necessary. you add text notes to complete the detail. click Detail Component. select M_Break Line. 30 In the Type Selector. Adding Text Notes on page 308. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Click again to specify the location of the text box. 6 Click Modify. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Adding Text Notes | 309 .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Enter the text. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. click Text. 2 On the Options Bar.rvt. click Dimension.

under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. and click the dimension text. under Text Fields. 3 In the Rename View dialog. (Filter Selection). on the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. right-click. select a text note. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Detail Components on page 310. for Suffix. click Roof Overhang Detail. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. Creating Detail Components In this exercise.rvt. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. right-click. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and click Rename. right-click.Keynotes.7 Select the dimension line. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and save the exercise file. and press DELETE. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. enter Roof Overhang Detail . 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing .. and click OK. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. enter Typ. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. click Select All Instances.

16 Click Modify. pressing TAB. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. click Training Files. in the Type Selector. Creating Detail Components | 311 . and selecting the chain. 14 Click Modify. select all the coping linework. select Medium Lines.7 Click Modify. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click Open.rft. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. while pressing CTRL. 15 Use a window to select all linework. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.

18 In the Save As dialog. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. enter Roof Edge. you place keynotes on objects. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 23 Using a window. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 22 Click Modify. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Adding Keynotes on page 312. double-click it in the Project Browser. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click Load into Projects. The original linework remains selected. 25 In the Filter dialog.rfa. select the coping. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. and click Save. for File name. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 30 In the drawing area. navigate to your preferred location. 24 On the Options Bar. 26 Press DELETE. click Load. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. click Training Files. 27 On the Design Bar. and click OK. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. click Detail Component. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. and click Open.Keynotes view is not the open view. delete the underlying linework. 28 On the Options Bar. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 21 To place the component. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. click . While pressing SHIFT. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 31 Using the same method used previously. clear Detail Items. and the component can be placed in the detail.

D11. Adding Keynotes | 313 . click Keynote ➤ Element. 19mm Plywood.rvt. use keynote 07645. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rfa. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. 6 Click Modify. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. In the Keynotes dialog. Click to place the leader arm. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.C1. select the metal fascia with drip edge. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. click Training Files. (Element Properties). click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. and click Open. Roof Edge4. 2 In the alert dialog. and click OK. use keynote 06160. 63mm Rigid Insulation. For the metal coping. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210.B5. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

20 Ga. use keynote 06160. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge.F1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar.F1. navigate to 07645. You do this in order to keynote the component.D11.I1. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. select Corrugated Metal. use keynote 06110. For the 50 x 150. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. using keynote 07460.9 In the Type Properties dialog. 22mm Corrugated Steel . click in the Value column. FasciaProfile_1. use keynote 09250. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. and click . 11 Click OK 3 times. click Detail Component. 12 On the Design Bar. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. For the 50 x 300. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. For the 50 x 200. 17 Keynote the component. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.D1. use keynote 06110. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. 15 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Keynotes dialog.G1.A8. use keynote 06110. click Keynote ➤ Element. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 18 Save the file.

8 In the Save As dialog. and click Open. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 On the Design Bar. 24 While pressing CTRL. click Training Files. click Training Files. 15 Click Modify. navigate to your preferred location. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Selector. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 19 In the Name dialog. 6 Lock the line. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . and click Save. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. click Load into Projects. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. select the left end point of the reference line. and select the right end point. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 Press DELETE. click Edit/New. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Lines. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Load.rvt. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 16 Select the component. 20 Click OK 3 times.rft. select Medium Lines. 4 In the Type Selector. for File name. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. click Detail Component. select Medium Line Detail Component. 5 In the drawing area. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. and click Open. click Duplicate. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. and click (Element Properties). 22 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. and click Modify. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.

39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 31 Select the component. and click . invisible.25 Next. click Detail Component. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. against the 19mm plywood. and assign it keynote 06110. 38 On the Design Bar. 40 Click Modify. 41 Select the component just added. and click . 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Edit/New. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 30 Click Modify. 29 In the drawing area. click (Move). click Duplicate. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. and click . 34 In the Name dialog. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 37 Click OK 3 times. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang.A1. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. enter EPDM Membrane. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. and assign it keynote 07260. 48 Using the same method used previously. and click OK. select m_Light Line Detail Component. on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Component. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. name the component Air Barrier. and hidden) used in the view. click in the Value column. 27 On the Design Bar. 47 Select the component. and click the lower end at the break line.A5. 49 With the component selected. and click .G1. click Detail Component. 44 On the Design Bar. 42 Using the same method used previously. 46 Click Modify. 28 In the Type Selector. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.

and click . 55 Click Modify. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 53 On the Options Bar. select Chain. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . 52 In the Type Selector. leaving the detail component lines.

add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. and assign it keynote 07260. 63 In the drawing area. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component.A4. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. Air Barrier. click Detail Component. click Keynote ➤ Element.58 Using the method used previously.rfa. select Invisible Lines. select the component. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 50 x 200 Framing. 68 In the drawing area. 60 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects.rfa. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 67 In the Type Selector. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 61 In the drawing area. in the Type Selector. name the component Vapor Barrier. and Vapor Barrier.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 71 In the drawing area. 70 Using the method used previously. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. under Keynote Table. and assign it keynote 07210. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. 3 In the text editor. click Browse.A1. click File menu ➤ Save. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. The database file opens in a text editor. and press TAB. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting.A9. 72 Save the file. and press TAB. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture.69 Select the component. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. and press ENTER.A4. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319.txt.. name the component Batt Insul. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit.rvt. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and close the text editor. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. Enter 07463. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Enter 07460. add a keynote for the component. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. and click .

12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. and click OK. Each keynote displays as a simple number. 13 Click Modify. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. 9 In the drawing area. select Absolute. The descriptive text for each keynote displays.txt. 14 Save the file. click to place the leader. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.A1. and click to place the note. click Keynote ➤ Element. under Path Type. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. These details do not update with changes to the building model. select all the keynotes. After you create a drafting view. and click OK. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). navigate to 07463. 11 Click Modify. you learn how to create a drafted detail. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. and click Open. In the Type Selector. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. For Positioning. and click OK. verify that Auto . Click Open. The detail that you import is in DWG format. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. select 1 : 5. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).rvt. select Black and White.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Scale. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. For Colors. The detail is imported as an import symbol. and click Rename. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Training Files. right-click Drafting 1. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail.dwg.Center to Center is selected. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise.

double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 5 Click Modify. 10 In the Rename dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. delete the existing value. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing .No Reference. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. for New. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Rename. and click Properties. click Callout. 6 Select the callout. 12 Click OK twice. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. select Reference other view. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. enter Detail . click Edit/New.

Elev. click Modify. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail ./Det. The callout is updated with the sheet information. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. and double-click the callout. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 18 Save the file. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 .No Reference). double-click A105 . drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all)./Sect. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise.

2 In the New Drafting View dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. enter Gyp.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Filled Region. click Region Properties. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . for Name. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. Board.rvt. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Edit/New. . enter Header @ Sliding Door. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. click Duplicate. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. and click OK. 5 In the Type Selector. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. for Name. 14 Click OK 3 times. 11 In the Name dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select Gypsum-Plaster. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Component. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

select Wide Lines. click . click 22 On the Options Bar. select the left and bottom edges of the region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . 19 In the Type Selector. 18 While pressing CTRL. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. 17 Click Modify. 16 Select the left edge of the region. click (Draw).5mm. select the width dimension.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Draw a rectangle as shown. click Finish Sketch. (Mirror). Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. and enter 20. and on the Edit toolbar. 20 On the Design Bar.

29 In the Type Properties dialog. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. 28 In the Element Properties dialog.Finish. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Region Properties. 30 In the Name dialog. 25 Click Modify.Finish. 24 Select the mirrored region. enter Wood . 33 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . . for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. and click above the top of the region as the end point. and click OK. for Name. Move the cursor up. click Duplicate.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. select Wood . click Filled Region.

verify that the thickness is 19mm. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click Filled Region. click . 37 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 .5mm. click Finish Sketch.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. in the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. 38 On the Design Bar. Draw a rectangle as shown. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. and select the right edge of the wood region. click (Align). verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. sketch the new region as shown. click (Rectangle). 40 On the Options Bar.

44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 47 Click the reference plane.42 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. For Offset. click Filled Region. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Finish Sketch. For Offset. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. enter 6mm. enter 10mm. click Ref Plane. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. (Align). 46 On the Tools toolbar. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click 48 Click Modify. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.

55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. and click to select the point. and select the bottom horizontal line. enter 0. and click to select the point. For Offset. 54 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . Move the cursor right 25mm. Move the cursor left 25mm. Move the cursor down 305mm. and click to select the point. click (Trim/Extend). click Finish Sketch. 56 On the Design Bar.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Select Chain. and press ENTER. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line.

navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 68 Click Modify. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. click Detail Component. top. and press ENTER. and click Open. 65 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. click Training Files. select the height dimension. enter 3mm. 62 Select the left detail line. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Detail Lines. select Medium Lines. 60 Select the left. and right edges of the door panel region. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).2mm. enter 76.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 61 Click Modify. click Load. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 58 In the Type Selector. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 69 Select the bolt. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . For Offset.

73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side.rfa. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. click Training Files. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Detail Component. click Detail Lines. 74 Select the expansion bolt. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar.70 On the Design Bar. 71 On the Options Bar. 76 In the Type Selector. select Wide Lines. click Load. and click Open. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. use the images as a guide. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 .

select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. 79 In the Type Selector. click . 80 On the Options Bar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 85 On the Options Bar. 84 On the Design Bar. (Mirror). 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing .78 On the Design Bar. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 82 Select the rectangle. 87 Click Modify. click . and on the Edit toolbar. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. click Detail Lines.

91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. 89 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . select Medium Lines. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. as shown. 90 In the Type Selector. click (Mirror). 92 Select the line. click Detail Lines. and on the Edit toolbar.

click . 95 On the Design Bar. and click to place the arc as shown. select the length dimension. enter 3mm. 97 On the Options Bar. 101 On the Design Bar. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. click Detail Component. and press ENTER. select M_Break Line.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Detail Lines. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 99 Click Modify. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 103 Add two break lines as shown. 102 In the Type Selector.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 .5mm Arial. click Dimension. and click Modify. 105 In the drawing area. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 108 In the Type Selector. click Dimension. 106 Click to place the dimension. using the Drag Text grip. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. and click Modify. 107 On the Design Bar. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. 110 Select the dimension line.

and enter 175 mm @ Type A. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. for Below. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . under Dimension Value.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. and then click the dimension text. enter See Schedule. select Replace With Text. and click the dimension text. 118 Select Modify to end the command. 114 Click OK. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . select Replace With Text. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions.2. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. under Dimension Value.5mmArial. and enter Varies. 113 Under Text Fields. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. click Dimension.

and on the Options Bar.121 Click OK. 127 Enter Gyp. select the gypsum board region on the left. 123 Click OK. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . and click to place the text. 126 In the drawing area. and click Modify. 125 In the Options Bar. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. click Text. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. click to create an arced leader. 128 Select the note. click (Add Right Arc Leader). Board. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. Enter 225 mm @ Type C.

click Modify to end the command. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .131 On the Design Bar. 132 Save the file.

you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation.rvt. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. and double-click East.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 339 . The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. click Training Files.

3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. type 1.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Symbol. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. click Training Files.rfa.Hexagon. for Number of Leaders. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 8 Select the keynote.

on the Options Bar.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. type Seal existing doors and insulate. under Identity Data. Creating a Note Block | 341 . for Text. 13 Select the tag. and click OK. and click above the tag to place the copy. click (Element Properties). click (Copy). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Edit toolbar.

click (Element Properties). 16 For Tag.14 With the copy selected. type Repair existing door surround. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. (Mirror). 19 With the tag selected. type B. 15 For Text. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Copy. 18 Using the same method. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. and on the Options Bar. and click. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. on the Options Bar. on the Edit toolbar. 17 Click OK.

and moving counter-clockwise. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. using the table as a reference. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Remove all existing windows. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. click Modify. Repair existing door surround. 22 Optionally. Clean exterior brick wall. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Tuckpoint as required.21 On the Design Bar. Repair as required.

select Tag. select Center. type Mark.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. for Note block name. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. verify that Arial is selected. On the Formatting tab. Select Text. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click Add. type Exterior Construction Notes. for Sort by. 28 In the Project Browser. under Available fields. type 6 mm. 26 Click OK. and drag it to the sheet. and select Bold. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. select Tag. for the value. Create. select Exterior Construction Notes. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. expand Sheets (all). On the Appearance tab. Clean cut and repair wall as required. type Description. format. and click OK. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. and double-click A103 . 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. for Header text. 27 In the column header (text). 29 In the Project Browser. and for Alignment. for Heading. and click Add.Elevations. expand Schedules/Quantities.

double-click T . Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Modify.31 On the Design Bar. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet.rvt. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project.

select Sheet Index. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 6 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. 5 In the list title field. select Sheet Number. and click Add. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. ■ 4 Click OK. in the second field. and in the third field. select does not equal. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. under Sheets (all). under Available fields. Select Sheet Name. expand Schedules/Quantities. type T. select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. The drawing list displays. for Sort by. and click Add. for Filter by.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 7 In the Project Browser. On the Filter tab. in the first field. and drag it to the sheet. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. double-click T .

On construction documents. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. door frame schedule. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. and door frames. On construction documents. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. windows. Training File Using Legends | 347 . NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. and so on). doors. click Modify. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends.9 On the Design Bar. For the text. 11 Save the file. Finally.

Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . 2 In the New Legend View dialog. select Arial. 9 For Text Font. type Typical Symbol Legend. type 3mm. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Name. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 6 On the Options Bar. you create a text type with the necessary size. click Text.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for Name.rvt.Open Level Head . and click OK. 10 For Text Size. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. click Symbol. click . and click OK. type Legend Text. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Duplicate.

and double-click A101 . verify that is selected. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note.Site Plan/Floor Plan. and click to place it. 14 Working from the top down. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . expand Legends. click Typical Symbol Legend. expand Sheets (all). and for Leader. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Project Browser.

select Viewport : No Titlemark. click Modify. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify.Unit 18. and click to place it. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 22 On the Design Bar. select Viewport : No Titlemark. under Sheets. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 21 In the Type Selector. double-click A102 .17 In the Type Selector. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Save the file.

rvt. and click OK. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. click Legend Component. select 1 : 50. For Host length. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. select Medium for Detail Level. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 5 On the View Control Bar. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. and press ENTER. select Section. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 3 For Scale. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. type 4th Floor Wall Types. For View. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. for Name. type 900 mm.

and on the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 10 Select the second wall. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. for Family. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 13 On the Options Bar. for Leader. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. click Text.9 On the Design Bar. click to add text without a leader. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.

click OK to accept the default titleblock. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. under Floor Plans. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. 23 In the Project Browser. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. right-click Sheets (all). pressing ENTER between component descriptions. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . and click New Sheet. and drag it to the new sheet. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select Level 4. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 19 Type the following text. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking.

click Modify to end the command. drag it onto the sheet. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . double-click Level 4. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 29 In the Project Browser. The open drawings are both visible. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet.25 In the Project Browser. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. under Floor Plans. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. under Legends. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Design Bar. select 4th Floor Wall Types.

Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 35 On the View Control Bar. 34 Select the patio divider wall. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. click (Match Type).Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. 33 In the floor plan view. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. select the Wall Type 2 component. select Detail Level: Medium.

These changes can be due to owner requests. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. You can create a sequence of revisions. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. or changes in building material availability.36 Optionally. In this exercise. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. contractor inquiries. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Using the table. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Floor Plans. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds.rvt. double-click Level 4. click 37 Save the file.

When Issued is selected. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. verify that Per Project is selected. 5 For Description. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. If you select Per Sheet. the revision is locked and issued to the field. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. In most instances. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. If Visible is not selected. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. if the active revision is number 1. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. For example. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. type a date. In general. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 7 Under Show.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. yet as concise as possible. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. When you use this option. for Numbering.

Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. under Floor Plans.rvt. click Modify. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 3 Select the divider. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. you make changes to the project floor plan. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the divider. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 4 On the Edit toolbar. move the cursor up. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. including revision number and revision date. click (Move). 9 Save the file. double-click Level 4.8 Click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. select Snaps Off. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 11 On the Design Bar. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Revision Cloud. In the Snaps dialog. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 8 In the drawing area. and click OK. click near the partition you moved. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 .

you load a revision tag into the project. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 17 Save the file. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Line Weight. click the Annotation Objects tab. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select 6. 16 Click OK.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud.

10 In the drawing area.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 .rfa. 4 On the Options Bar. you need to add one. You then issue a revision. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. click OK. you create additional revisions in the revision table. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 5 In the Tags dialog. scroll down to Revision Clouds. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. the cloud is tagged as number 1. under Floor Plans. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. 12 Save the file. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Training Files. click Tags. and because the revision is the first in the project. select Leader. double-click Level 4.rvt. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. 8 In the Tags dialog. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click to place the tag. Because you chose to number by project. 6 Click Load. the tag is displayed inside the cloud.

Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and enter a date. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. select Issued. under Sheets. you prevent further changes to the revision. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. and click OK.rvt. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. type Modify Paving Area. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. and enter a date for the revision.Unnamed. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. click Add. NOTE After you issue a revision. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. 8 Add another revision row. 7 For Description. You do this by issuing the revision. you can no longer modify it. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. You can continue to add revisions. with the description Relocate Door.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. double-click A107 .

apply Seq. Working with Revisions | 363 . under Floor Plans. 13 Click Finish Sketch. 15 On the Options Bar. select Revision Cloud. under Sheets (all). click to add a revision clouds. 3 . 19 To add tags. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. 12 In the drawing area. 11 On the Drafting tab.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. 10 In the Project Browser. select Seq. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. 20 On the Project Browser.Unnamed. double-click A107 . 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. for Revision. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 17 Using the same method learned previously. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. select Tag ➤ By Category. 2 . in the drawing area.Modify Paving Area. double-click Level 4. select the revision cloud.

Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. select Alphabetic. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. height. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. You do this so that the revision can be changed. you edit the titleblock family. Click Options. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. select the titleblock. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. and rotation) to the revision schedule. For each revision. clear Issued. for Sequence. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Numbering. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. 25 Click OK twice. 26 In the drawing area. beginning with "D". delete the first 3 characters.

35 Select the existing schedule lines. 34 On the Design Bar. click Yes. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. click Edit Family. click Yes. click Edit. 28 In the alert dialog. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. and drag it above the schedule area. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. Select Outline. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. select Bottom-up. Select Grid lines.27 On the Options Bar. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. Clear Blank row before data. and click Properties. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. right-click Revision Schedule. click Modify. for Build Schedule. Working with Revisions | 365 . click Load into Projects. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. and press DELETE. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. under Other. for Appearance. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 33 Select the schedule header.

Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. for Height. 40 Select the revision schedule header. When the height property is variable. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser.. With a user-defined height. select User defined. 45 On the Appearance tab. open the titleblock family for editing. and on the Options Bar. for Formatting. for Rotation on Sheet. right-click Revision Schedule. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . the schedule is restricted to a specific size. under Other. click Edit. select the revision schedule. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. enter Rev. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. for Heading. and click Properties. select 90° Counterclockwise. 46 Click OK twice.

click Yes. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. text. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. click Load into Projects.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 51 Save the file. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. you learn to import information (such as images. 50 In the Reload Family dialog.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. and place it on a sheet. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 1 In the Project Browser. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.Title Sheet. double-click T . you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet.rvt. under Sheets.Importing Image Files In this exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Text. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. click Training Files. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Leader. under Sheets. double-click T .JPG. click Modify. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .rvt. click to add text without a leader.

10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . 6 Select the text. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 9 On the Design Bar.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement.doc text file in another window. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 11 Save the file. with the new text box still selected. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. click Modify. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project.

10 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. This process may vary from system to system. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. click Training Files. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. for Name. 12 Save the file. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Modify.xls. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. under Sheets. click Desktop. 5 Click OK. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .rvt. select the document writer. 4 Under Printer. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. This exercise demonstrates a common method. double-click A102 . 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. click File menu ➤ Print. for File name. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format.JPG. and click Save.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Unit 18.mdi. type Fixture Schedule. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. This step has been completed for you. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule.JPG.

as well as a large lab building. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. 371 . you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you break up the plan into sections. called dependent views. To effectively document this project. The large floor plan. or footprint.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.

Aviary. 6 In the drawing area. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . select the crop region. for Name. 2 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. The dependent view opens. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. right-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. double-click Level 2. and the model crop is the interior crop region. under Level 2. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 5 Click in the drawing area. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. enter Level 2 .Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region.

click (Hide Crop Region).8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. 9 On the View Control Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

enter Level 2 . 14 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. and click Rename. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 12 In the Project Browser.10 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit.Labs. and on the Zoom flyout. right-click Level 2. 11 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the crop region. and on the Zoom flyout. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click OK. 13 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. for Name. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

click Modify. under Floor Plans. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. and on the Zoom flyout. double-click Level 2. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . click Zoom To Fit. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. click Matchline. 20 Click in the drawing area. 18 On the Design Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). 19 On the View Control Bar.

Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. click Finish Sketch. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. 24 On the Design Bar. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Click above the left corner of the lab building.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. and click.

30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. and click OK. enter Level 2 Aviary. for Name. click OK to accept the default titleblock. right-click A101 . click the Annotation Objects tab. and click Rename. select 9. 31 In the Project Browser. 27 Under Matchline.Aviary. 33 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. for Line Weight. expand Sheets. select Double Dash. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . 28 For Line Pattern.Unnamed. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. click Level 2 . and drag it onto the sheet.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click OK.

39 On the Options Bar.35 On the Design Bar. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. and place the Level 2 . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. under Floor Plans. for Target view. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click View Reference.Aviary is selected. double-click Level 2. click Modify. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Labs dependent view on the sheet.

select Floor Plan: Level 2 . NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 44 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Zoom flyout. 41 On the Options Bar. for Target view.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.Labs. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. click Modify. click Zoom To Fit. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

click the far right control. click (Show Crop Region). after modifying the annotation crop region. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. right-click. double-click Level 2 . and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. under Floor Plans.Aviary. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 48 Select the crop region. 47 On the View Control Bar.46 In the Project Browser. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 49 If. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display.

After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. select all views in the list. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. click Zoom To Fit. 54 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click Apply Dependent Views. right-click Level 2. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. expand Level 1. 51 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 53 In the Select Views dialog. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). 55 On the Zoom flyout. 52 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. but are not placed on sheets.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. The matchline is already placed in the view. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.57 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click South Elevation. and double-click South Elevation. click Training Files.

for Name. 5 In the drawing area. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left.Left. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click South Elevation. enter South Elevation . 10 In the Rename View dialog. cropping the view to the aviary. and click OK. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 7 On the View Control Bar. enter South Elevation . expand South Elevation.The dependent view opens. and click Rename. 11 Select the crop region. 8 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click (Hide Crop Region). and drag it toward the center of the view. and click Rename.Right. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . cropping the view to the lab building. 3 In the Project Browser. for Name. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. and click OK. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. select the Crop Region.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

click Modify. Creating a Perspective View | 403 . Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.15 On the Design Bar.

Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. The perspective view displays.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. on the View tab of the Design Bar. c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Camera.

and adjust the field of vision. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted.3 Zoom out. If the camera is not shown in the view. as shown. right-click 3D View 1. and click Show Camera. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. as necessary. double-click Site. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. Depending on camera placement. in the Project Browser. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. With the camera shown. and select the crop boundary. under Floor Plans.

9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 10 Save the file. enter Exterior . double-click Exterior . under 3D Views. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 8 In the Project Browser.Day. and click Rename.Day to open the view. right-click 3D View 1.

under 3D Views.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise.rvt. and render a daytime view of the exterior. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Exterior . Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. You then duplicate the view. modify render settings.Day.

5 In the Rename dialog. select Spring Equinox. select Sky: Cloudy. NOTE If a background image is required. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 6 Click OK twice.Santa Monica. for New. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. You create a location and time for the rendering. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Medium. 8 Under Quality. In this case. under Background. 3 In the Rendering dialog. select Edit/New. 7 In the Rendering dialog. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. click (Show Rendering Dialog). enter Spring Equinox . for Setting. 3pm. for Sun. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. under Lighting. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. You adjust cloud settings as required. and click Render. and click Rename.

13 Close the Rendering dialog. click Export.png). 10 In the Rendering dialog. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Desktop. For Files of type. After the image is rendered.9 In the Rendering dialog. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . select Portable Network Graphics (*. click Show the model. Click Save. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. click Show the rendering.

for Scheme. 22 Using the same method. click Dialog). highlight 9 :Sconce Light . right-click Exterior . click New. and click OK. 16 With the Exterior . 21 In the Light Groups dialog. and click Move to Group. enter Pool House Lights. and select the last light. To create a similar view using different rendering settings.Flat Round : 60W .Day. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . and click OK. under Group Options. press and hold SHIFT. under Ungrouped Lights. enter Pool Lights. dialog. under 3D Views. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. select Exterior: Artificial only.Day view to Exterior . and click Artificial Lights.Exterior .120V through 14 :Sconce Light . 27 In the Rendering dialog. add 30 :Sconce Light . click Render. click New. under Lighting. click OK. To select a sequential list. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. for Name.Flat Round : 60W . under Group Options. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. select the first light. verify that Pool Lights is selected. 25 Using the same method. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights .Night.120V to the Pool Lights group. 19 In the New Light Group dialog.Flat Round : 60W . for Name.Night. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. you duplicate the view and change the settings. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.120V. on the View Control Bar.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser.Flat Round : 60W .120V through 35 :Sconce Light . 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Ungrouped Lights. and click OK. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.Night view open. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

you change the brightness of the exposure. and click OK. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. click Adjust Exposure. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. 32 Save the file. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. After the image is rendered.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . In this example. click Show the model. under Image. 30 In the Rendering dialog. for Exposure Value. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. enter 4.

you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. and finally. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house.rvt. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Adding RPC People In this exercise. render the views.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. define the perspective view and rendering settings. c_Pool_House_in_progress.

and on the Edit toolbar. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. ■ (Rotate). 6 Select the figure. select RPC Female : YinYin. 4 In the Type Selector. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. and place the component inside the pool house. click Modify. click Component. double-click Level 1. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. Exact placement is not important.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. Adding RPC People | 413 . 5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the person’s line of sight.

select Cast Reflections. 13 On the Design Bar. click Edit. In order to see the figure’s reflection. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. under Parameters.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. you can enable this option. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 12 Click OK 3 times. By default. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the Options Bar. under Identity Data. for Render Appearance Properties. click (Element Properties). click Modify. 14 Save the file. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. click Edit/New.

click Camera.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.rvt. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. c_Pool_House_in_progress.

and click Properties.The perspective view displays. select Section Box. under 3D Views. 4 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click 3D View 1. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Extents. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. and click OK. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window.

Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . under Elevations (Building Elevations). 9 In the Project Browser. 11 In the 3D view. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. in addition to the 3D view. select the section box. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. In order to accurately adjust the section box.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click South.

418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. right-click. select the section box.12 In the floor plan view. size the box as shown. 14 In the 3D view. size the box as shown. 13 In the South Elevation view.

Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. doors that contain windows or glass. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. and render the interior view. 17 Save the file. To create a daytime view.15 Maximize the 3D view. and curtain walls. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior.

and click OK. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. enter Interior . select Interior: Artificial only. After these settings are established. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. click Render. right-click 3D View 1. select Draft. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. 3 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views.Night. click (Show Rendering Dialog). You can specify a lower quality. 8 In the Rendering dialog. under Lighting. 2 In the Rename View dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you turn them off for this scene. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .rvt. for Setting. 7 Under Quality. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. and click Rename. and click OK. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. clear Pool Lights. 5 Click Artificial Lights. 4 In the Rendering dialog. c_Pool_House_in_progress. for Scheme. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight.

for Sun. For more information on daylight portals. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. 13 In the Rendering dialog. for Daylight Portal Options. By default they are turned off. click Copy To Custom. and click OK.Santa Monica. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . see the Revit Architecture Online Help. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. you must create a custom setting. (Show Rendering Dialog). Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. select Region. The preset schemes are read-only. for Scheme. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. 3pm. in order to turn on daylight portals. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. You create a view for the interior during the day. select Interior: Sun only.Day. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. and click Render. For sunlit interiors.9 Close the Rendering dialog. select Spring Equinox . You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. select Curtain Walls.Night. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . the daylight portals can be turned on. click 14 For Setting. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In this case. select Edit. right-click Interior . 17 In the Rendering dialog. but the space will receive standard daylighting. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog.

(Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .18 In the Rendering dialog. enter 10. and on the Options Bar. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. enter 1. and close the Rendering dialog. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. In the next steps. 20 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. For Saturation. under Image. click Properties). Click OK. click Adjust Exposure. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. select the column on the right.

click OK. under Output Settings. 24 In the Materials dialog. click the dimensions for Size. select Printer. select Scale (locked proportions). select Based on wood grain. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. select Wood. you can define the output and quality settings for final output.6. for Resolution. and on the Options Bar. click (Show Rendering Dialog). Click OK. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. select High. select Unfinished. You change the varnish setting. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. For Rotate. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 23 With the column still selected. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. For Width. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 29 In the Rendering dialog. add a bump map to create texture. clear Region. for Setting. 30 In the drawing area. For Amount. the render time increases significantly. select the crop boundary. For Bump. 26 Click Update Preview. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . and click Render. and click OK. As size and DPI are increased. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. enter 5''.22 In the Element Properties dialog. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. enter 90.

In a plan view. but you can also define it in a 3D. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. The walkthrough path is a spline. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path.The rendered image displays. Usually. elevation. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. independent of the Revit Architecture software. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. or section view. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view.

on the Options Bar. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. verify that Perspective is selected. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. and ends in the far corner of the living room. If you prefer to use metric values. click Training Files. click Walkthrough. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and open Common\c_Townhouse. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. and change unit formats as desired. and click the tab in the context menu. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. and double-click 1st Floor.rvt. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. expand Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. proceeds through the dining room. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser.

The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. on the Options Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. click Finish. and double-click Walkthrough 1.

The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). verify that Field of view is selected. enter 1. 16 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. click the dimensions for Size. 13 On the Options Bar. select the crop boundary. and click OK. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 11 Under Change. enter 16''. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 14 Click . enter 9''. If it is not. click Edit Walkthrough. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. for Frame. for Width. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). and click OK. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 17 Click . 12 On the View menu. and select the crop boundary. and for Height. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 .

The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise.The walkthrough plays. clear Far Clip Active. c_Townhouse. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. under Floor Plans. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. proceed to the next exercise. click Edit Walkthrough. click (Element Properties). and click OK. under Extents. press ESC. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. double-click 1st Floor. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

for Controls. and drag it to the location shown. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . 6 On the Options Bar.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 7 Click the third key frame position. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. select Path. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown.

5 In the Video Compression dialog. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. . 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. hidden line. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. on the Options Bar. for Frames/sec. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Walkthroughs. and click OK. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. under Output Length. reducing the size of the image. select <Shading>. double-click Walkthrough 1. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 3 Under Format. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. shading with edges. click File menu ➤ Save As. When you export the walkthrough. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Edit Walkthrough. and click OK. enter 15. specifying the number of frames. The walkthrough is recorded. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 8 If you want to save this exercise. If you are unsure of what option to use. 9 To play the walkthrough. shading. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. for Compressor. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. for Model Graphics Style.rvt. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. c_Townhouse. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. or rendering. and click Save.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough.

More specifically. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. In this tutorial. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. 431 . You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.

expand Floor Plans. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. 4 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. expand Views (all). 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. A 3D view is created. as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. (SteeringWheels).rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. click shown. and open Common\c_Solar_Study.Courtyard View In this exercise. and double-click 01 Entry. 1 In the Project Browser.Creating a Solar Study .

2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . click Save As. 7 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. click Modify. expand 3D Views.5 On the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 On the File menu. enter Solar Study . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you create a section cutaway view. as shown. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. click Section. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. if necessary. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration.Courtyard View. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. under Floor Plans. and click Rename.

5 On the Design Bar. 6 To view the section. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. click . Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. and click OK. right-click Section 1. (SteeringWheels). 7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click 10 On the View toolbar. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . as shown. 11 On the SteeringWheel. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. double-click the section head. expand Sections.

17 To hide the section box. and click OK. including the house. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. as shown. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 6 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Typical plan views.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. click Save. 15 In the Rename View dialog. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. then Fine. then select Medium. clear Section Boxes. 18 On the File menu. you create a plan cutaway view. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 16 On the View Control Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Callout. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. 5 In the Project Browser. In some cases.14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. right-click {3D}. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . right-click Callout of 01 Entry. double-click 01 Entry. click . 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. do not display many elements in 3D. and click Rename. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse.

11 On the Design Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. click Modify. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 15 Select the Roof. 9 On the SteeringWheel. as shown. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area.8 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 16 On the View Control Bar. so you can see into the building from the top. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. as shown. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building.

under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. under 3D Views. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study .Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. and click OK. 21 On the File menu. 20 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Rename View dialog. click Save. and click Rename. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. right-click {3D}.17 On the View Control Bar.

For this study. you specify the location. single-day. For the Multi-Day solar study. 4 For Sun Position. and time. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . You can create a still. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. Los Angeles.Creating Solar Studies . . and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. MA. CA. click . 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. date. 2 On the View Control Bar. 10 Under Place. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. or multi-day solar study. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . select Los Angeles. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 3 Select Cast Shadows. For the Single-Day solar study. for City. click click OK. click . Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser.Boston. 9 In the Name dialog. USA. enter Summer Solstice. Click the Single-Day tab.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. and click Duplicate. leave the slider at 50. and time range. date range. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. expand Views (all). expand 3D Views. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. and click OK. USA is selected. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. you specify the location. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson.

7 On the Options Bar. for Date. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. click OK. click . 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 2008. 14 In this case. 8 On the Options Bar. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. under Frame. Los Angeles. click Save. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study.Courtyard View is currently displayed. and click OK. Under Frame. enter 20 and press ENTER. Clear Ground Plane at Level. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. Los Angeles is selected. 6 On the View Control Bar. enter 10 and press ENTER. confirm that Summer Solstice. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. 16 In the Name dialog. 19 On the File menu. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 .12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. select June 22. and click OK. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Sun Position. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . enter Winter Solstice. For Time Range. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 2 On the View Control Bar. click .rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ For Time Interval. click OK. Los Angeles. 2008. and click Duplicate. select December 22. and click OK. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. select Winter Solstice. on the Single-Day tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. approximately as shown. The solar study animation plays. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. double-click 01 Entry. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click OK.■ To display the next key frame. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. click To play the animation from start to finish. click . PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. under Floor Plans.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. click To display the next sequential frame. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . 14 On the Options Bar. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. for Sun Position. Los Angeles. select Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . click . on the Single-Day tab. . click Text. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. . Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. 13 On the View Control Bar. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK.

6 On the View Control Bar. On the Options Bar. click . NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. expand 3D Views. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. 5 In the Project Browser. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. as shown. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. click Lines. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 .■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. 8 For Sun Position. as shown. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. click . Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. Click and enter Dining. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. approximately as shown. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

On the Annotation Categories tab. On the Annotation Categories tab. select the section box. 14 Click outside of the section box. and click OK. ■ For Frames per second. under Output Length. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. and click OK. as shown. select Summer Solstice. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . clear Section Boxes. and click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. on the Single-Day tab. select Frame Range. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. and enter 5 to 50. 15 To hide the section box. 12 In the drawing area. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. if necessary.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. click OK. 11 To display the section box. select Section Boxes. verify that the value is set to 15. Los Angeles.

you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. To view the animation. Click OK. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. verify that the value is set to 15. verify that Hidden Line is selected. Los Angeles. select Winter Solstice. For Files of Type. or frame. for Model Graphics Style. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. enter 450 in the first field (width). you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. on the Single-Day tab. and click OK. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 2 On the View Control Bar. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. To maintain the proportions of the frame. of the animation separately. select AVI Files. verify that Hidden Line is selected. for Compressor. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. For Frames per second. for Model Graphics Style. For File Name. For Dimensions. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. select Frame Range. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . you open each image. Under Format. 21 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. and enter 5 to 10. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. under Output Length. 3 For Sun Position. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.■ ■ Under Format. and click OK.Los Angeles. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions.

In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. select PNG. For File name. BMP. click Save. enter 450 in the first field (width). Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. TIFF.Los Angeles. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. such as JPEG. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building.■ For Dimensions. Click OK. under 3D Views. For Files of Type. or any single-frame format. click the Desktop icon. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. 8 Click Save. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . as shown: 9 On the File menu. In this example. or GIF. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. depending on the Frame Range. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway .

as shown.2 Select the section box in the drawing area. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.

USA. 5 Select the roof. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ .Los Angeles . Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. For Time Interval. select One week. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. click the Multi-Day tab.Week Interval.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. For Time.Boston. and click OK. for Sun Position. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . 8 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. MA. and click OK. and click OK. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. and click Duplicate. specify 2:00 pm. 12 In the Name dialog. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. for File name enter 2pm . 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and on the View Control Bar. clear Section Boxes.

■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. for File Name. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. and click OK. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click 01 Entry.West or North . enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. you mirror all model elements. Click the Desktop icon. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. such as East . Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. model views.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Re-orienting the Project | 447 .South. and click Save. for Compressor. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. When you mirror a project. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. under Floor Plans. and annotations in non-drafting views. select Full Frames (Uncompressed).rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. In the Length/Format dialog. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. click OK. 17 On the View Control Bar. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.

Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.West.West axis. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. 5 In the warning dialog. click OK.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. For additional information. In this exercise. 6 On the Standard toolbar. Then. The project is mirrored along the East . and click OK. right-click. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. select East . 2 In the drawing area. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. select the roof. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.

10 Under Date and Time. click the Still tab. 8 For Sun Position. select Summer Solstice. click . 12 Under Date and Time. 11 For Sun Position. and click OK. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. and click OK. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . change the time back to 12:00 PM. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 5 For Sun Position. For example. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. and click OK. and select Winter Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.3 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . click Apply. specify 11:00 AM for time. on the Still tab. Orienting to True North | 449 .

click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. double-click 01 Entry. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. 15 For Sun Position. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. 14 On the View Control Bar.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and select Winter Solstice. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. This process establishes the view setting to True North. When a project is started. 19 In the Project Browser. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. for Orientation. the view settings must be set for True North. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click the Still tab. and click OK. under Floor Plans. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. 18 In the Project Browser. select True North. click . right click 01 Entry. click OK. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. click OK.

click above the end of the magenta line representing True North.■ To establish the True North direction. ■ To establish the new direction of True North. The floor plan rotates in the view. as shown. click toward the top of the screen. Orienting to True North | 451 .

select Summer Solstice. and click Apply. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. right-click. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select True North. under 3D Views. and click Properties. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. 28 In the Project Browser. for Orientation. 27 In the Rename View dialog. 32 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click Element Properties. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. and click OK. and click Rename.23 In the Project Browser. select Project North. for Orientation. right-click 01 Entry. 25 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. right-click. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. enter True North Orientation. select True North Orientation. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click . click the Still tab. and click OK. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . right-click 01 Entry. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 For Sun Position.

verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. click OK. Los Angeles. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Desktop icon. Click OK. under Format. For Files of Type. enter 600 in the first field. In the Length/Format dialog. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. for Dimensions. for Compressor. click Summer Solstice. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Orienting to True North | 453 . and click OK. and click OK. verify that AVI Files is selected. Click Save. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. For File Name. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click the Single-Day tab. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway.

and exporting it as a JPEG image. For Sun. Since a rendered image is temporary. 3 On the View Control Bar. select Winter Solstice. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. In the Name dialog. capturing it. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under 3D Views. select Edit/New. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Under Lighting. (Show Rendering Dialog). 2 In the Project Browser. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. select 12/22. for Setting. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and 2:00 PM.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. under Quality. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Rendered views do not have this limitation. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. and click OK. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Date and Time. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. under 3D Views. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. select Medium. click Render. select Interior: Sun only. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. In this exercise. under Settings. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. and click Duplicate. for Scheme. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog.

and click OK. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog.6 In the Rendering dialog. and click Save. enter living area_winter solstice. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. click Save to Project. verify that JPEG Files is selected. click Desktop. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . NOTE Rendered views are temporary. click Export. For Files of type.

456 .

use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. In this tutorial. sections. advanced model graphics. linework. When organizing presentation graphics. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. you explore the stylistic approach. type. or the client. you can choose between realism and stylistics. Whether the audience is the general contractor. and section boxes. Co-house. elevations. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. For the realistic approach. an outside reviewer. a consultant. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. They include rendering. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. length. Other tools in the software. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. however. Using the pre-built building model. In this series of exercises. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. 457 . and details. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture.

458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . To fit the floor plan into the analytique. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a presentation floor plan. you create a copy of the plan.

3 In the Rename View dialog. exit the menu. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.rvt. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. click in the drawing area. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. and click OK. click Training Files. and click Rename. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Cnst. right-click 2nd Flr. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Cohouse.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. Cnst. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.

UP Text. this represents the view getting smaller. navigate to the folder of your choice.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. click the Annotation Categories tab. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. elevations. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. and clear DOWN Text. Down Arrow. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. expand the Stairs category. click the Scale control and select 1:100. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. dimensions. 8 Click OK. 11 In the Save As directory. and Up Arrow.rvt. and click Save. and other annotations in this view. sections. 7 Under Visibility. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. No annotations display in the view. This turns off the visibility of all tags. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

click (Shadows Off). specify 35. At that place. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . for Date and Time. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. and select 1st Flr. you can create.rvt. you can select any city. 12 Click OK. modify. 9 For City. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. click the Place tab. select Cast Shadows. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. The higher the number. For Sun Position. select Sun and Shadow Settings.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. If you select a different city. select Boston. MA. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click OK. 7 For Place. Cnst. Within a project. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. ■ For Contrast. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. 2 On the View Control Bar. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. click . select By Date. on the Still tab. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. click . 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. Time and Place. and click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 6 Under Settings. specify 10/27. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser. the darker the shadows. 3 On the View Control Bar. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. NOTE For this step. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. however. 1:00 PM. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click (Shadows On). and click OK.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. under Settings. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. for Sun Position. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. clear Ground Plane at Level. . 18 Click File menu ➤ Save.

and notice the view title. click Add View. and click to place it. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. TIP If the View tab is not available. and click View. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Modify. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 .Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. and click OK. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Arch Portrait. The viewport displays at the cursor. 6 On the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog.

To accomplish this. select No. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. and click Activate View. click . under Graphics. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. The viewport no longer displays a view title. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. and click OK. for Show Title. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 12 In the Name dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. enter Presentation. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. For this analytique.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique.

23 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Type Selector. fill properties. click Filled Region. 20 On the Options Bar. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. click Region Properties. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. 18 On the Options Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. and select Chain. click . select Invisible lines. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. click Edit/New. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 22 On the Design Bar. If necessary. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. When you finish drawing the chain. and the boundary of the region. click . The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes.

verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. for Fill Pattern. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. under Name. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. scroll down. and click OK. and click View Properties. and click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. and click Deactivate View. and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog.24 In the Type Properties dialog. for Sheet Name. click . Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter Solid Black. select Solid fill. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 25 In the Name dialog. click Finish Sketch. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. and click OK. under Identity Data. click Duplicate. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. enter Presentation. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. under Graphics.

expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 .rvt. right-click South. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view.

and click OK. scroll up. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . click Override. specify 2:30 PM. under Visibility. enter Presentation South Elevation. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and clear Elevation Swing. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. exit the menu. 11 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. 9 Click OK. click Duplicate. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. click in the drawing area. 12 Under Shadow. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. under Pattern Overrides. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. select By Date. under Settings. click OK. 13 For Contrast. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Elevations. click in the Walls row. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. Time and Place. and click OK. right-click Copy of South. click (Shadows Off). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. By changing the angle of the sun. and click OK. 14 For Sun Position. 18 For Time. expand the Doors category. on the Model Categories tab. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. under Visibility. 16 In the Name dialog. clear Visible. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active.2 In the Project Browser. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. specify 35. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select Cast Shadows.

click Add View. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. and click Add View to Sheet. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.rvt. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Views dialog. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.Presentation. double-click A105 .20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

select Viewport : Presentation.The viewport displays a view title. 5 In the Type Selector. The view title no longer displays. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

9 Proceed with the next lesson.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. click Modify. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views.

4 Add the section shown below.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. click Section. for Scale. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. 3 On the Options Bar. select 1: 100. and use the flip arrows if necessary. under Floor Plans. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Cnst. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 1st Flr.

To accomplish this. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. expand Sections (Callout 1). click Callout. To fit correctly in the analytique. as shown. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. this view needs to be rotated 180°. select 1 : 100. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. 7 On the Options Bar. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. and double-click Section 2. for Scale.Section 2 is added to the building model.

12 In the Project Browser. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Pattern Overrides. under Sections (Callout 1). clear Visible. click Modify. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. click the Model Categories tab. under Sections (Callout 1). 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. expand the Doors category.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Rename. 11 In the Rename View dialog. 15 Under Visibility. right-click Callout of Section 2. 10 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and clear Elevation Swing. double-click Presentation Section 2. 17 Under Visibility. click Override. enter Presentation Section 2. scroll up. click in the Walls row. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls.

20 Click OK. 22 On the View Control Bar.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. (Hide Crop Region). The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 24 Proceed with the next exercise. click The crop regions no longer display. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. When you select the crop region. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries.

click . click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off).Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. 6 In the Name dialog. Click Apply. The shadows do not offer much contrast. in the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. For Contrast. 3 On the View Control Bar. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. ■ For Sun Position. In the steps that follow. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify 35. click Duplicate. select Cast Shadows. 2 On the View Control Bar. double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1). specify the following: Under Shadow. In addition. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

and click OK. For Azimuth. click (Shadows On). Silhouette Edges. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. For Altitude. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. for Silhouette style.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. NOTE The line style. select Directly. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . specify 70°. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. Click OK. was added to this training file for training purposes. click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 135°. and click Advanced Model Graphics. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Select Relative to View.

4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise.Presentation. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 3 In the Views dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. select Section: Presentation Section 2. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). and click Add View to Sheet. and click to place the selected view. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. click Add View.

8 Select the callout that you added previously. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. 9 On the Edit toolbar. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . The view title no longer displays. and press Enter. under Sections (Callout 1). you click to specify the start radius. The section needs to be rotated 180°. Using a clock as a reference. double-click Section 2. click Modify. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. 6 On the Design Bar. To rotate an object. click (Rotate). In the steps that follow. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view.5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation.

under Sheets (all). 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown.The callout rotates 180°. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned.Presentation. double-click A105 . Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.

14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. click Modify. and drag it up and to the left as shown. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. 15 On the Design Bar. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. After applying the view template to a new section view. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 .

and click OK. enter Presentation Section 1. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. enter Presentation. right-click Copy of Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Type 1). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. under Sections (Callout 1). 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click OK. right-click Section 1. double-click Presentation Section 2. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 4 In the View Templates dialog. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click Rename. 3 In the New View Template dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. you can simply apply the presentation view template.

for Rotation on Sheet. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. select Presentation. under Names. annotations. and click OK. and click Activate View. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.Presentation. 12 In the Views dialog. double-click A105 . Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 15 Right-click the viewport. and elevation swings no longer display. The furniture. 18 Right-click the viewport. and click Add View to Sheet. under Graphics. select Viewport : Presentation. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 14 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click Add View. and click Deactivate View. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. lighting fixtures. select 90° Counterclockwise. select Section: Presentation Section 1. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 .

In this exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . such as a tracery window or a column capital. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. traditional analytiques contain a detail.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. After you add the callout. select the callout.rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Callout. under Sections (Type 1). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Section 1. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. as shown. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of Section 1. and click Rename.

8 Right-click. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Presentation Callout. clear Crop Region Visible. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. as shown. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . clear Annotation Crop. under Sections (Callout 1). 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click OK. 7 Select the crop region. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. double-click Presentation Callout.5 In the Rename View dialog. and click View Properties. under Extents.

specify 22. click Modify. and click Add View to Sheet. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . double-click A105 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. 14 In the Type Selector. Click OK. select Custom. and click Activate View. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. For Scale Value 1. under Sheets (all). select Viewport : Presentation. 12 In the Views dialog. click Add View. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Presentation Callout. 15 On the Design Bar.Presentation. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. click Region Properties. activate the viewport. and make adjustments as necessary. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. 23 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. and click Deactivate View. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. When finished. click Filled Region. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. click Edit/New. In the steps that follow. and move it to the position shown below. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Presentation Callout.19 Right-click the callout presentation view.

double-click A105 . select Solid fill. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. on the Design Bar. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click Activate View. for Fill Pattern. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. click . and click OK 3 times. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. click Filled Region.25 In the Type Properties dialog. 28 In the Project Browser.Presentation. under Sheets (all). click Finish Sketch. When you are finished. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.

click . and sketch the rectangle shown below.31 On the Options Bar. 33 On the View Control Bar. 34 Select the crop region. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click (Show Crop Region). 32 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save.35 On the View Control Bar. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. and click Deactivate View. click (Hide Crop Region). you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. 38 Proceed with the next lesson.

Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click 1 : 200. 3 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. double-click Isometric. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. click the Scale control. click (Shadows Off). Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and apply shadows to the views. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. 5 On the View Control Bar.

Select 1st Flr. 14 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. enter Isometric 1. 12 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . under 3D Views.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. and click OK. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. under Extents. right-click Isometric. and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog. specify 45°. click Duplicate. in the list. and click OK. right-click Isometric 1. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. For Altitude. For Azimuth. double-click Isometric 2. 15 In the Rename View dialog. specify 135°. under 3D Views. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 13 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click . Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. select Directly. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. select Silhouette Edges. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. For Contrast. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. specify 35. select Section Box. and click OK. for Silhouette style. A section box displays around the building model. Select Ground Plane at Level. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. under 3D Views. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Isometric 2. Cnst. Select Relative to View. Click OK. For Sun Position. and click OK.

TIP Notice the rotation symbol. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Modify on the Design Bar. as shown.19 Select the section box. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. When you are finished. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. You can use this to rotate the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box.

If desired. 24 In the Project Browser. When you are finished. clear Section Boxes. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Modify on the Design Bar. make a copy of the view. under 3D Views. Next. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. double-click Isometric 3. 29 To hide the section box. 23 In the Rename View dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. The section box no longer displays. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Viewport : Presentation. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. right-click Isometric 2. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. and click Rename. under 3D Views. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. and click OK. double-click Isometric 2. clear Section Boxes. enter Isometric 3. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. 25 To hide the section box.Presentation. 31 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the section box. and click OK. double-click A105 . under 3D Views. under Sheets (all). 22 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 .Before turning off the visibility of the section box. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. you can adjust the plane location. the stairs and railings may display.

In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow.32 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. select Viewport : Presentation. The filled region partially covers the view. In the Type Selector. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. 33 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under 3D Views.

click Edit. click Edit/New. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 .Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. select Concrete. This will make it easier to draw lines. select Transparent. 41 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. for Fill Patterns. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. click Lines. 36 On the Design Bar. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. 35 Select the poche filled region. click Region Properties. 39 For Background. 40 Click OK twice. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 42 Using the drawing tools. and click Activate View. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done.

498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 46 Click OK twice. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. click Region Properties. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 47 On the Design Bar. for Fill Pattern. select Solid fill. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Finish Sketch. and click Deactivate View.43 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. under Floor Plans. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you add it to the presentation sheet. then you specify the eye direction and range. The view opens immediately. Cnst. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. a cutaway perspective view. you create the final view for the analytique. double-click 1st Flr. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . click Camera.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. for Silhouette style. select Silhouette Edges. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). click . 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar. For Sun Position. and click OK. and click OK. for Name. specify the following: Under Shadow. specify 35. For Contrast. select Cast Shadows.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it.

under Extents. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . A section box now cuts through the building model. 12 Select the section box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Grips display on each plane of the section box.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. select Section Box. and click OK. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well.

On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 18 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). In the Type Selector. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. you must specify the actual size of the image. under Change.Presentation. and click OK. for Width. and click OK. clear Section Boxes.14 Select the crop region. under Sheets (all). and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 21 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Options Bar. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. enter 165 mm. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. double-click A105 . 17 Under Model Crop Size. select Scale (locked proportions). 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under 3D Views. select Viewport : Presentation. click Size. 19 To hide the section box. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser.

Presentation sheet is not the active view. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. click . and click OK.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. specify a text size of 6 mm. select Text : Title. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK. click Edit/New. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click OK. 6 In the Name dialog. specify a text size of 40 mm. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser. select the same font as the title. click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Name dialog. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. under Text. enter Title. select a font. under Text. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Annotating the Analytique | 503 .22 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 On the Options Bar. enter Description. click Text. click Duplicate.

18 On the Design Bar. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 16 In the Type Selector.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. click Modify. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. select Text : Description. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

and roofs. 507 . After you import the SketchUp model. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. such as walls. you can easily add detail with Revit components. curtain walls.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. that compose the building. In this tutorial. Once the model has been imported. you create a small building from the front mass form.

click the Massing tab. 10 In the Name dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click OK. For Layers. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .skp. select All. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click Training Files. right-click in the Design Bar. Double-click the Common folder. click OK. visible elements. and click Save. under Template file.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. enter Import SketchUp. click Create Mass.rte. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. for File name. Click the Sketchup file. or select from a list. and click OK. select SketchUp Files. 6 In the Save As dialog. buildings. 4 In the New Project dialog. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. select Auto-Detect. enter SketchUp Model. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Preserve. you create a Revit Architecture project. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. and not in the library. For Import units. For Colors. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. For Files of type. 9 In the informational dialog. click Browse.

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. and roofs. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. such as walls.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. ■ ■ For Positioning. For Place at level. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. 17 In the warning dialog. 14 On the View toolbar. depending on the complexity of the project. Level 1 is the only choice. 16 On the Design Bar.Center. curtain walls. click . select Level 1. In a new project. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. click the Close button. select Manual . 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. Click Open.

verify Level 2 is selected. click Roof by Face. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and on the View Control Bar. and roofs. 3 In the Type Selector. curtain walls. such as walls.18 Proceed to the next exercise. for Level. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.400mm displays. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . You turn their visibility off to view only the building. After you create the building from the mass faces. verify Basic Roof: Generic . 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. that compose the building. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select the face so that it highlights in red. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. 4 On the Options Bar. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form.

on the View toolbar. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. To see the new roof. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . verify that Select Multiple is selected. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. click Create Roof. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 6 On the Options Bar.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. A roof is created from the mass face. on the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. click to display masses.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. click Create Roof.

512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 12 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Roof by Face.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click Create Roof. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

click Modify to end the command. click Wall by Face. select Core Face: Exterior. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. click roofs that you created. for Loc Line.15 On the Design Bar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . 16 On the View toolbar. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 23 On the Options Bar.200mm displays. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. 22 In the Type Selector. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. verify Basic Wall: Generic .

514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. 25 On the View toolbar. 28 In the Type Selector. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. click Curtain System by Face. click to view only the walls and roofs.

30 On the Options Bar. 32 On the View toolbar. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 31 Using the same technique. click Create System. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 .

click Roof by Face.35 On the Design Bar. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. click Create System. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. 38 Select the mass face shown below. and on the Options Bar. click Create Roof. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. and select it. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. select the other wall. click Wall by Face. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. click Curtain System. and on the Options Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

click Camera. 42 On the View toolbar. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . click to view the building that you have created. Below the right corner of the view. 43 Click to redisplay the masses.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. and select the mass face shown below. specify a point to place the camera. click Wall by Face. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser.

48 On the View toolbar. to view only the walls. specify a point for the camera target. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . roofs. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. The perspective view created by the camera displays. as shown. Click the frame to display its grips. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. click your building in the view.

and select the left curtain system in the view. for Justification. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. 50 On the Options Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . click . click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. select Center. select Center. click Modify. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Under Grid 2 Pattern.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. Under Grid 1 Pattern. for Justification.

63 In the Type Selector. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under 3D Views. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. and move the roof edges as shown below. 59 On the View toolbar. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. double-click {3D}. double-click 3D View 1. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.54 Select each roof to display its grips. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. and click Cancel to end the command. click Door. 55 Right-click. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 56 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.

65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. and mullions. to resize the system. To switch panel types. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. This affects the entire curtain system. panel. you need to change the length of the wall. For example. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. you create a curtain system using the wall command. and they are not windows.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. or you can use a specific curtain system command. Unlike windows. Like windows. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. To change grids. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Like walls. and you can change these elements individually. you need to select a panel. 525 . they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. you select the grid. grid lines. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. Creating an Entrance In this exercise.

1 In the Project Browser. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 4 In the Type Selector. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. click Wall.rvt. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. click Training Files. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. and double-click Ground Floor.

and double-click Southeast Isometric. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. Creating an Entrance | 527 . 8 In the Project Browser.

and click (Properties). The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. enter 1200. top constraint. top and base attachments. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . using curtain grids. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. and room bounding. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. Click OK.11 Select the curtain system. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. For Top Offset.

Creating an Entrance | 529 . and click Rename. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Elevation. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. right-click Elevation 1 . 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 18 In the Project Browser. click Curtain Grid. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 20 In the drawing area. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line.a. click Modify. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. and click OK. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary.

one larger than the other. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. and click OK. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. SIXTH FLOOR. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. select SECOND FLOOR. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. FIFTH FLOOR. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .26 While pressing CTRL. THIRD FLOOR. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Click to create a vertical grid. FOURTH FLOOR. Click to place another grid line. while pressing CTRL. click Modify. and SEVENTH FLOOR. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 33 On the Design Bar.

Instead of using the Door command. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. The segment line style changes to dashed. Creating an Entrance | 531 . 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. click Add or Remove Segments. and on the Options Bar. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. and then select the segment above it. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. The two segments are removed. you add a doorway to the curtain system.Next. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel.

and lock them. 40 On the Options Bar.38 Using the same method. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 39 On the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 42 Place dimensions as shown. select One Segment.

To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. Use the following image as a guide. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. Creating an Entrance | 533 .TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. click in any white space to exit the editor. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 43 Delete the dimensions. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels.

52 On the Type Selector. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. These panels schedule as doors. 57 On the View Control Bar. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. not as curtain panels. double-click Entrance Elevation. on the new curtain system you added.rfa. under Elevations. 55 In the Project Browser. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. . click Training Files. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . under Floor Plans. click view. This changes the graphics style of the Next. 56 In the Project Browser. The panel changes to a double door. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. and click Wireframe. click Modify. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 54 On the Design Bar. Now.Next. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. They are part of the curtain panel category.

66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. Creating an Entrance | 535 . click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. and the solid panels display in white. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click System Panel : Solid.60 On the Type Selector. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 63 Click OK twice. The glazed panels display in blue. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. 61 With the panel still selected. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 65 On the View Control Bar. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click .

click Mullion. 4 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. select Grid Line Segment. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click Save As.68 On the File menu.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. select Entire Grid Line. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

10 Delete the mullions below them. so you remove them next. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. however.6 On the Options Bar. there are a few that you do not want. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . select All Empty Segments. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. clickModify. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. You are going to change some mullion joins. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. because their width reduces the size of the doors. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar.

Finally. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Click the top mullion control. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. double-click Southeast Isometric. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. click Modify. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. 17 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 16 In the Project Browser. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .Two mullion join controls display. you can also right-click.

You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. click Wall. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. for Top Constraint. Finally. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Click OK. Curved Curtain System | 539 . 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. double-click GROUND FLOOR. you add a curtain system using the wall command. 7 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . enter 1200. 4 In the Type Selector. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. For Top Offset. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. (Arc passing through three points).

double-click East. you place grids on the system. Next. You are going to use one of these snaps points. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. and then sixteenths. eighths. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 14 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. under Elevations. Divide the halves into quarters. click Curtain Grid. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc.

click Modify. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. select the bottom layer of panels. you change some panels in the system. select Basic Wall: Generic .15 Zoom in to the cylinder. Next. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. 16 On the Design Bar. to filter out all 19 Save the file. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. 18 In the Type Selector. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids.300mm.

click Lines. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. select Glass. 5 On the Design Bar. click . click Finish Sketch. and on the Options Bar. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . clear Chain.rft. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. enter 100. under Elevations. 4 On the Design Bar. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. . and click . 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. click Training Files. 9 Select the extrusion. 3 In the Project Browser. click Model Lines. double-click Exterior. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. for Depth.

20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted.Pattern.rfa family. 24 On the View toolbar. All fourth floor panels are selected.14 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click (Default 3D View). 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. right-click. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid.Pattern. click 25 On the View toolbar. 19 In the Project Browser. and return to the project file. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. (SteeringWheels). 16 Click File menu ➤ Close.Pattern. 21 In the Type Selector. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . under Floor Plans. select Curtain Panel . and save the family as Curtain Panel . 23 Right-click. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. and click Change Walls Orientation. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.

right-click. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. under Floor Plans. All the panels change to the solid panel. 27 In the Project Browser. 29 In the Type Selector. All fifth floor panels are selected. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. select System Panel .The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc.Solid. 30 Save the file. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

click Training Files. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. Click again to specify the ending point. for Profile Usage. and select it. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click East. and enter 50 mm for the radius. click ■ ■ For Sides. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. select Mullion. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. For vertical mullions.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. click Lines. and click OK. enter 8. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). Select Radius. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. . click Mullion. under Elevations. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rft.

rfa family. click Modify. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 12 Select the lines in the octagon.detail. and click Visibility. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. clear Fine. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close.rfa. 27 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . and click OK. 31 Click . it can be added as a mullion type. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and return to the project file. clear Coarse and Medium. click Mullion. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click (SteeringWheels). 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. After the new profile is loaded. double-click Southeast Isometric. under 3D Views. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 28 On the View toolbar. click Training Files.rfa. 19 On the Design Bar. click Visibility. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Detail Component. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog.11 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the detail component. click Modify. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown.

35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 44 Save the file. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. 37 Click OK twice. select Circular Mullion for Family. select All Empty Segments. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 36 Under Construction. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. click Duplicate. and click OK. 43 Press DELETE. for Profile.32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 33 Click Edit/New. 38 On the Options Bar. right-click. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . You have placed more mullions than you want. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. so you remove the unwanted ones. 41 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 40 On the Design Bar.

Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. under Floor Plans. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. you learned to create a curved curtain system. and press TAB. and then apply those custom elements to the system. make custom curtain panels and mullions. TIP To chain select all the walls. and a ruled curtain system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click TOP OF ROOF. select Defines slope. In this lesson. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. a storefront system. All the inside faces highlight. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. and you can click to select them all. 4 On the Design Bar.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 5 On the Options Bar.

18 Save the file. 9 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. enter 600. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. 14 On the Options Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system.7 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. click Modify. select Entire Grid Line. click Roof Properties. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. Click OK. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Mullion. 17 On the View Control Bar. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Sloped Glazings | 549 . 11 On the View Control Bar.

double-click GROUND FLOOR. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall.Storefront System In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. click Wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. and enter 2400. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. select Unconnected for Height. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 4 In the Type Selector.

For this wall. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. even if the wall height changes. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. Storefront System | 551 .7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. 12 Select the storefront wall. which is specified in the type. click Edit/New. To see how the grid layout is defined. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. under 3D Views. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. 10 In the Project Browser. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. double-click Southeast Isometric. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. click Modify. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. and click . and press ENTER. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. 9 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. This specifies an exact length for the wall. enter 10200 mm. 8 Click the temporary dimension.

and Offset. double-click Southeast Isometric. 19 Select a curtain grid. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. By setting the Angle value. select All Empty Segments.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. see the Revit Architecture help. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. click Mullion. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. center. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. 16 Click OK. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. or end. under 3D Views. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. In this exercise. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. enter 15. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. you find Number. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. 20 Save the file. 1 In the Project Browser. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. 18 On the Options Bar. Justification. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. Angle. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For more information about these curtain wall parameters.

click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . and highlight the model line.3 On the View Control Bar. 6 Click the highlighted line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight.

click Modify. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 9 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the panel. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall.8 Select the highlighted line. click Curtain Grid. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Next. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 11 Click OK. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. A panel between the 2 lines is created. and click .

embed a curtain system inside another wall. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. 18 Save the file. and then eighths. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. quarters. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. Finally. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . and then eighths. select System Panel : Solid. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. and define a ruled curtain system. quarters. right-click. 16 In the Type Selector. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2.

556 .

and low sloped roofs. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009.Roofs 15 In this lesson. gutters. In addition. In this exercise. 557 . gable. you learn how to add fascia. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this tutorial. Before you can sketch the roof profile. and soffits to the roofs that you create. you learn to create several different types of roofs. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. You do not need to create the work plane. shed. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. In this lesson. mansard. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. including hip. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide.

7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and open Metric\m_Roofs. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. and click OK. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. select Name. and so on). 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 4 Click OK. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans. click Ref Plane. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. expand Views (all). TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. click the blue square on the witness line. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 1 In the Project Browser. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. centerline. 5 In the Go To View dialog. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Finish Sketch to complete the roof.Next. sketch the roof profile. 16 On the View toolbar. select Chain.

press TAB. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. and select the second wall. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 18 Select the edge of the roof. 21 In the Project Browser. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. Next. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. expand Sections (Type 1). 17 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the exterior face of the wall. expand Views (all). Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . 19 On the Tools toolbar. and double-click Section 1. press CTRL. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). click Modify. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. The roof should resemble the following illustration.

562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 26 On the View toolbar.24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click model. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint.

expand Views (all). 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. and enter 600 for Overhang. 3 In the Project Browser. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. and double-click Garage Roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 .rvt. expand Floor Plans. Next. click Pick Walls. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that Defines slope is selected.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. and click Yes. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Roofs. sketch the roof footprint. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

and on the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. click the model. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 14 When you see the informational dialog. click (Properties). clear Defines slope. 11 Press CTRL. and click OK. 15 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Finish Roof. click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar. under Dimensions. select both slope definition lines. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. By default. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Next. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

expand Floor Plans. and enter 600 for Overhang. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. press TAB. click Pick Walls. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. When you complete the roof. m_Roofs.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. clear Defines slope. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint.rvt. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. 1 In the Project Browser.

9 Using automatic snaps. select Defines Slope. click Lines. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. sketch the chimney opening.6 Click to select all the walls. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 15 On the Options bar. click (Rectangle). click Finish Roof. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 8 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. add new slope lines to the roof. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. select Defines Slope. 10 On the View menu. click Modify.

19 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. and double-click Level 2.rvt. m_Roofs. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. expand Views (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and enter 600 for Overhang.18 On the View toolbar. select Defines slope.

click (Trim/Extend). 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Next. close the roof sketch. Next. click Lines. 9 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical slope definition line. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and click (Pick Lines). 11 To trim the first line segment. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. using the following illustration for guidance. 10 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. clear Defines Slope. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other.

13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels). Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Roof Properties. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. Next. 14 Under Constraints. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click Modify.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. and click OK. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof.

21 Click (SteeringWheels). Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. join the two remaining walls to the roof. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Next. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. 23 On the Tools toolbar. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571.

6 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . 8 On the Tools toolbar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Views (all). 4 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click (Trim/Extend). trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. and enter 300 for Overhang. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. click Pick Walls. select the left vertical roof line. Next. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. press TAB. 10 To trim the first line segment. enter 0 for Overhang. m_Roofs. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. and double-click Level 2. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch.

18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 19 On the View toolbar. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. and press ENTER. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. select Defines slope.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. you add a slope-defining line. and click OK. expand 3D Views. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 16 Under Constraints. click 20 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. expand Views (all). click Modify. and double-click 3D. (SteeringWheels). click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. m_Roofs. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 13 On the Options Bar. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Roof Properties. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 5 On the View menu. To help locate the position of each split. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 2. you need to add two reference planes. click (Pick Lines). 12 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Before you can add slope arrows. click Slope Arrow. add two new slope arrows. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 9 On the Tools menu. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. expand Views (all). click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 7 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. clear Defines Slope. Next. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. click Ref Plane. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 14 On the Options Bar. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click Split Walls and Lines.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. and enter 600 for Offset. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration.

select both slope arrows. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. and click 19 Under Constraints. and double-click Garage Roof. select Slope for Specify. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 1 In the Project Browser.15 to add the second slope arrow. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. enter 500 for Rise/1000. expand Floor Plans. and then click OK. click Modify. When eave heights differ. 18 Press CTRL. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. click Edit. expand Views (all). Begin the tail at the right reference plane. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 20 Under Dimensions. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. When you sketch a hip roof.rvt. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. the adjacent eave heights must align. (Properties). 3 On the Options Bar. and move the cursor to place the arrow. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. 16 Repeat steps 13 . m_Roofs.

5 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). (Properties). 10 On the Options Bar. select a method to align the eaves. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. click Align Eaves. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. The eave lines display with a dimension. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. on the File menu. and click OK. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. select Defines Slope. When aligning eaves. under Dimensions. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 14 If you want to save your changes. click Finish Roof. Next. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 12 On the Design Bar. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 13 On the View toolbar. click Save As.

3 Select the roof and. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. (Properties). expand Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. click Modify. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . under Constraints. and double-click North. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3.rvt. click Training Files. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. on the Options Bar.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise.

Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . click Lines. expand Views (all). click Finish Roof. Next.6 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then select Defines slope. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. under Dimensions. click Modify. and double-click Level 3. press TAB. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click (Pick Lines). and select the remaining three lines. expand Floor Plans. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 10 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click . 7 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar.

Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. you add a roof to a building shell. click Save As. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. After you add the roof. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.17 On the View toolbar. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click mansard roof. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. on the File menu. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes.rvt.

verify that Defines slope is not selected. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. double-click Roof. 3 On the Design Bar.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . under Floor Plans. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. click Pick Walls. 5 In the drawing area. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 4 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. for Type. select Steel Truss . click Finish Roof.EPDM. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.Insulation on Metal Deck . 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Trim/Extend).Because the walls are not continuous. 11 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. click Roof Properties. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. 7 On the Tools toolbar.

you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. click (Draw Split Lines). 16 On the Options Bar. double-click the section head to open the section view. In the next steps. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click to select it. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. The roof has been created. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. double-click Roof.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area.

move the cursor horizontally to the left. and select a point on the opposite roof line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 18 Move the cursor down. 20 Using the same method. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center.

23 On the Options Bar. (Add points). Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. Next. on the Options Bar. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. In this exercise. click (Modify Sub-Elements).The roof is now divided into 6 sections. exact placement of the points is not important. You modify the points individually.

enter -2''. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 25 Using the same method.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . for the dimension. click (Modify Sub-Elements). The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points.

31 Select the roof slab. 29 On the Design Bar. enter 4''. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. and on the Options Bar. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. click (Properties).27 Press and hold CTRL. for Elevation. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . click Modify. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. including the interior edges of the roof regions. and press ENTER. and select all of the roof edges.

The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. 35 Click OK 3 times. for the Thermal/Air Layer. you learn how to create roof fascia. and Soffits on page 586. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Gutters. gutters. 37 If you want to save your changes. and soffits. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you can easily create its fascia. Creating Fascia. Gutters. under Construction. Creating Fascia. 36 View the results in the section view. and Soffits In this lesson. on the File menu.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. click Edit/New. After you create a roof. gutters. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. By making the insulation layer variable. click Save As. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. In some cases this type of slope is desired. and soffits in Revit Architecture. for Structure. The entire slab is sloped. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Variable. click Edit.

enter Built-up Fascia. and click Open. click Training Files. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Common\c_Condominium.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. 3 Press CTRL. 5 On the Options Bar. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. click Training Files. 6 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. click (Properties). In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia.rfa. and click OK twice. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 8 In the Name dialog. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Construction. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and click OK. click Duplicate. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.

Creating Gutters on page 588. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs .11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 2 On the Options Bar. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. c_Condominium. click (Properties). you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model.rvt.

click Edit/New. 10 Click to place the gutter. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate.3 In the Properties dialog. under Construction. Creating Soffits on page 590. Creating Gutters | 589 . and click OK. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click in the Value field for Material. . 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. and click OK three times.

You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. c_Condominium. 3 On the Design Bar. click Pick Roofs. and double-click Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. expand Floor Plans. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you learn how to place a roof soffit. expand Views.Creating Soffits In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

expand Views (all). 7 On the Tools menu. and double-click 3D. 8 Select the roof. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap.4 Select the roof. 5 On the Design Bar. and then select the soffit to join them. 6 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. Creating Soffits | 591 . click Join Geometry. click Finish Sketch.

592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name.9 If you want to save your changes.

select Millimeters. For Unit Suffix. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas.rvt. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. 593 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. If you are using metric units. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. and open Common\c_Area. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Training Files. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. Finally. click Project Units. Click OK. select mm. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. under Length. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. your values will be different. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. 2 In the Project Units dialog. In the final exercise.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial.

■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. click the Area Schemes tab. expand Floor Plans. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. These schemes define spatial relationships. For Rounding. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. and click Room and Area. or 0. the system-computed height defaults to the level. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated.3 Under Area. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. select 2 decimal places. For Unit Suffix. select Square meters. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. click Settings. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. click OK. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Views (all). select m2. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Click OK. it is not necessary in this exercise. click the Room Calculations tab.

notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Area Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. If you select No. 12 When the informational dialog displays. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. click Area. under Views (all). forming a closed loop. 9 Click Cancel. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. rather than the area tag. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically.You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. you must manually add these boundary lines. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. To modify the area. When you select Yes in this dialog. you must select one of the reference lines. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Click OK. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''.

NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. Next. and store area. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. click Area Plan. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. common areas. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Click OK. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. you create a new area plan for rentable space. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . click Area Boundary.

28 In the Element Properties dialog. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. click Modify. If you do not select this option. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 27 On the Options Bar. click Area. When you pick the walls. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag.When you add area boundary lines. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . 25 On the Design Bar. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. you can either draw them or pick them. 23 On the Design Bar. and click to select the area. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. click ■ .

33 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Element Properties dialog. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. Click OK. 32 On the Options Bar. Click OK. click Modify and select the area. click Area. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 29 On the Design Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. 31 On the Design Bar.■ ■ Select Office area for Area Type. click ■ ■ ■ .

enter Core for Name. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . and select Store Area for Area Type. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model.■ Click OK. and Tenant 4 in the lower right.

37 On the File menu. and click Save. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.Notice that within the two store areas. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . and click to place the legend. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. name the project Area-in progress. In the next exercise. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. click Save. In this exercise. click Color Scheme Legend. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces.rvt. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area.

8 Add the fields Area and Name. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. 7 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. select Area Type and click Add. under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. select Areas (Rentable).3 When the dialog displays.

9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .

and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. floors. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. roofs. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. and floors. you can specify the view to display massing elements. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. and perimeter information. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. curtain systems. volume. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. and roofs. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. You assign the default wall. In this tutorial. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. building elements. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. floor. After you make building elements. At any time. After creating mass floors. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. you then need to update the building face. If you modify a massing face. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. or both. 603 . You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area.

rvt. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. and click Massing. click Training Files. sweeps. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. double-click Level 1.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and cutting geometry. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Create Mass. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

for Name. (Pick Lines). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click (Default 3D View). 8 On the Design Bar. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 13 On the View toolbar. click Lines. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. and on the Options Bar. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. 15 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. under Views (all). under Constraints. and click . for Offset. enter 1550 mm. for Extrusion End. click the value for Material. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. enter 25000. click Finish Sketch. double-click Level 1. under Materials and Finishes. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. click 18 On the Options Bar. click Lines. (Line). and click OK. under Floor Plans. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 16 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. select Mass (Opaque). 10 In the Materials dialog. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 .

29 In the Work Plane dialog. click the value for Material. 25 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. press TAB to highlight the entire face. double-click {3D} to see the results. for Extrusion End. click Finish Sketch. enter 25000. 30 In the drawing area. The second form is on top of the first form. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Extrusion Properties. under Views (all). for Name. 26 In the Project Browser. double-click West. and click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. highlight the larger form. under Views (all). enter 27500. TIP If necessary. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 28 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. 23 In the Materials dialog. and click . and click OK. for Extrusion Start. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. select Mass (Transparent).Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Pick a plane.

and clear Chain. click (Arc passing through three points). Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Lines.31 Click to select the face. Next. and click to select the line start point. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. and on the Options Bar. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. (Pick Lines). 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 34 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). 37 On the Options Bar.

and delete the vertical construction line. (Line). Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click Modify. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 39 On the Design Bar. 45 In the Project Browser. click (Move).TIP If you do not see this option. 46 On the Design Bar. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. click Lines and. on the Options Bar. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click East. under Views (all). 41 On the Edit toolbar. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click Edit Top.

click Finish Sketch. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click 49 Create an arc as shown. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. click Blend Properties. click (Default 3D View).48 On the Options Bar. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. 52 On the Design Bar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. 53 On the View toolbar. (Arc passing through three points). for Material. and click OK. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . 50 On the Design Bar. In the next exercise. In this exercise.

610 | Chapter 17 Massing . and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click (Line). These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. 7 Using the same technique. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. under Views (all). 9 On the Design Bar. click Lines. under Floor Plans. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. m_Massing_Start. 4 On the Options bar.rvt. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. as shown. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. click Ref Plane. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. select the mass. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. and select Chain.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 2 In the drawing area. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. double-click Level 1. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. 1 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Options Bar. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right.

In this exercise. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. 16 On the Design Bar. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. for Extrusion End. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 14 Under Constraints. When sketching each extrusion. click Finish Sketch. snap the corners to the intersections. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. click (Default 3D View). on the View Control Bar. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. 15 Click OK. Using Swept Blends | 611 . 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. enter 0. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. 17 On the View toolbar. click Extrusion Properties. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. and click Lines. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. ■ For the radius. under Floor Plans.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. m_Massing_Start. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). click Sketch 2D Path. 3 On the Design Bar. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . select a point below the mass elements. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1.rvt.

click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. Using Swept Blends | 613 . 9 On the Options Bar. as shown.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. click (Default 3D View). click Finish Path. and click Edit. click (Rectangle). 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. 6 On the Design Bar. The only way to align these elements is visually. 10 On the Design Bar. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. 8 On the Design Bar. click Profile 1.

click (Align).) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass.13 On the Tools toolbar. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . 15 On the Design Bar. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. click Profile 2. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. click Finish Profile. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. 17 Using the same method. and press ESC.

click Finish Profile. click Finish Swept Blend. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the Design Bar. 22 Click OK twice. 21 In the Materials dialog. Using Swept Blends | 615 . click <By Category>. select Mass (Transparent). under Materials and Finishes.18 On the Design Bar. and click . click Swept Blend Properties.

Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. In this exercise.rvt. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . you create new family types from a mass family file. Finally. You place several instances of the mass families into the project.24 On the Design Bar. click Finish Mass. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study.

rfa. enter 46000mm. and click OK. In this exercise. and click Apply. 4 In the Family Types dialog. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . and click OK. 5 Click New. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. and for Name. 7 Click New. and click Apply. click New. and click OK. enter 68000 mm. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Depth. enter 11000 mm. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 8 For Width. click Family Types. enter 18000 mm. for Depth. enter 18000 mm.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 3 In the Name dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 Click OK. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. for Height. and for Name. and click Apply. enter 9000 mm. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm.rfa. 6 For Width. for Height. enter 6000 mm. enter 15000mm. enter 12000 mm. for Depth. for Height. for Width. under Other. 11 Save the file as Box-Training.

2 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Semi Barrel Vault. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa. double-click Site.rfa family files. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. and Triangle. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . as shown. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place.rvt. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Place Mass. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 1 If not already selected. click Training Files.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise.rfa. on the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Open the Box-Training. Arc Dome. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. You also load other existing mass families and place them. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. 3 On the View Control Bar.rfa. under Floor Plans.

click (Element Properties). and click (Element Properties). 11 Select the box. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. for the Material parameter. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . 24 On the Design Bar. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. and click OK twice. 14 In the Type Selector. enter 90 for Angle. click Place Mass. 25 In the drawing area. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 23 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. select the 3 boxes. specify Mass (Transparent). click Modify. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. as shown. 17 Press CTRL. click Modify. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. specify Mass (Opaque). 21 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar.10 On the Design Bar. click Place Mass. for the Material parameter. select the triangle. click Modify. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rotate after placement. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and click to place the mass.

32 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. specify Mass (Transparent). for the Material parameter. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Place Mass. and click (Element Properties). click (Default 3D View).26 Select the triangle. and click OK twice. 29 In the Type Selector. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . for the Material parameter. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 33 On the View toolbar. specify Mass (Opaque). and click OK twice. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties).

(Join Geometry). you join these mass elements. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. click (Default 3D View). You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. click 2 On the Tools toolbar.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. In the next exercise. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise.rvt file. NOTE When you join geometry. In this exercise. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element.

on the Edit toolbar. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. double-click Site. 4 Select the triangle. under Floor Plans.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. under Views (all). click (Mirror).

10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . enter SM.8 On the Options Bar. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. as shown. 17 Press ESC to see the result. and then select the triangle. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. click (Draw). for Axis. click (Default 3D View). TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. (Join Geometry). and snap to the midpoint of the edge.

rvt. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options.In this exercise.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. (If Design Options is already selected. you joined mass elements together. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. and select the triangle mass element. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. click Modify. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. click (Add to Design Option Set). The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. 1 On the Design Bar. do not clear the check mark. 2 On the Window menu. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson.

13 On the Design Bar. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. 8 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Options Bar. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. clear Curved. and click (Element Properties). select Rotate after placement. under Floor Plans. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). select Sloped (primary). and click OK twice. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. click Place Mass. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. click Modify. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. for Angle. for the Material parameter. 7 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click Place Mass. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. double-click Site. under Views (all). enter 90. 14 In the drawing area. 17 In the Type Selector.

click Modify. under 3D Views. select Curved. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). 20 In the drawing area. TIP To find the correct shapes. click (Add to Design Option Set). 26 On the Design Options toolbar. and click OK twice. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. double-click North. double-click {3D}. specify Mass (Transparent). and click OK. under Views (all). clear Sloped. While pressing CTRL. under Elevations. 28 In the Project Browser. for the Material parameter. 23 On the View Control Bar. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. 22 In the Project Browser.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. select the three arc domes. and click (Element Properties). and watch the status bar. 19 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog.

you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . 31 Click the value for Design Option. under Option. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. and click Close. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option.rvt. and click OK. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 35 On the File menu. you can make it the primary option. click (Design Options). select Curved and. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. you placed mass elements into Design Options. In this exercise. select Curved from the Design Option menu. click Make Primary. click the Design Options tab. 34 Close the warning that displays. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson.

double-click {3D}. click Wall by Face.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model.Brick on CMU. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. click (Pick Faces). 2 On the View toolbar. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. 5 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Basic Wall: Exterior . and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. select Wall Centerline. click Training Files.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and for Loc Line. you pick massing faces to create walls. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing .

alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. 9 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face. click Wall by Face. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . 12 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 5. 15 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). double-click Level 3. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 11 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. 16 In the Type Selector. click Wall by Face. double-click Level 1.

23 Open the 3D view to see the results. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 20 On the View Control Bar. If desired. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 21 On the Design Bar.18 Select all the faces shown in red. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face. 19 In the Project Browser. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. under Views (all). double-click Level 9.

Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. 4 Click OK. and exterior surface area. volume. Curtain Systems. and click OK. click Modify. under Views (all). double-click {3D}.In this exercise. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. When you select levels. and Walls. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. clear Curtain Panels. 3 On the Model Categories tab.rvt. 8 On the Design Bar. perimeter. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Mass Floors. 1 In the Project Browser. select all levels. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 6 On the Options Bar.

and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. click Mass Floors.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. select Levels 1-4. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 10 Press CTRL. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. click Mass Floors. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar.14 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. select Level 1. 15 Press CTRL. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view.

select Floor Area. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. Floor Volume. 4 Using the same method.rvt. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. and click Add. The Floor Area. and select Level. press and hold SHIFT. under Available fields. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Floor Perimeter. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). 2 In the New Schedule dialog. schedules can be created using the mass floors. select Mass Floor. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. under Category. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK.In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

for Sort by. select Mass: Family and Type. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . for Usage. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. and click OK. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. enter Retail. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule.

636 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Scheduled fields (in order). 14 Select Level. for Fields. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. under Other. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. After you assign usage. click Edit. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. select Mass: Family and Type. expand Schedules/Quantities. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Remove. 13 With Usage selected. and click Properties.

elevation. and click Rename. and in the field below. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. click Edit. under Other. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). select Floor Area. for Filter by. and click OK. 18 On the Filter tab. under Other. click Edit. select Usage. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. for Filter. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and click OK. enter Hotel. under Fields.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 24 In the Project Browser. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. select Usage. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. and plan views. for Then by. 16 On the Formatting tab. for Filter. 23 In the Rename View dialog. for Sort by. select Level. and click Properties. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. for Field formatting. in the field under Filter by. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . 27 Click OK twice. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. and select Grand totals. 22 In the Project Browser. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 19 Click OK twice. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

638 | Chapter 17 Massing . 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown.rvt. you created mass floor schedules. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof by Face.In this exercise. under Views (all). floor perimeter. double-click {3D}. by level. the floor area. you pick massing faces to create roofs. The mass floor schedules list. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise.

5 On the Options Bar.4 In the Type Selector. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. select Basic Roof : Generic . click Create Roof.400mm. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. Your model should now look as shown. click Create Roof. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 .

create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 12 On the Options Bar. select Curtain Panels. Curtain Systems. and click OK. and Walls. click Create Roof. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . In this exercise. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. select Sloped Glazing. 15 Click the Model Categories tab.8 Using the method you just learned. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. in the Type Selector. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 13 Using the same method.

Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm.rvt. 5 Press CTRL. click Create System. 3 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Options Bar. double-click {3D}. 1 In the Project Browser. click Curtain System by Face. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). verify that Select Multiple is selected. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 .

642 | Chapter 17 Massing . 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. select the blended form on the in-place mass.7 Using the same method.

11 Using the same method.9 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. click Create System.

644 | Chapter 17 Massing . In this exercise. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.12 Click Modify to exit the command. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you change the size of an existing mass family. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.rvt. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

3 On the Model Categories tab. double-click Site. under Views (all). clear Curtain Panels. 7 On the Options Bar. enter 30000. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . and then click OK. and click (Element Properties). 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. Next. 6 On the Design Bar. Roofs. and Walls. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. Curtain Systems.1 In the Project Browser. for Width. Floors. and click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. click Visibility/Graphics. 2 On the View menu. click Modify. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. clear Exclude Design Options. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.

under Floor Plans. In the next steps. double-click Level 1. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . 11 In the Project Browser. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. under Views (all). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 12 On the View Control Bar.10 Open the 3D view to see the result.

remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. click Remake. Also. 16 On the View toolbar. you want to select the smaller one. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . 14 On the Options Bar. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 17 Select the roof as shown. click OK.TIP To select the curtain wall. click (Default 3D View).

click Remake. and click Remake.18 On the Options Bar. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing .

Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. 1 Open the 3D view. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule.rvt.20 In the Project Browser. you changed the size of an existing mass family. under Schedules/Quantities. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. In this exercise.

Massing only. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 9 Select Mass. and click OK.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 8 Click None to clear the selection. click All to select all categories. right-click {3D}. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 4 Rename the view 3D . under 3D Views.

you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. You might create the model shown. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . such as columns and an extruded roof. This concludes the massing tutorial. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model.In this exercise. If desired. to the building shell.

652 .

You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. In another exercise. By grouping objects. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you add the new model group to a previously created group. You can also nest groups within other groups. You mirror one instance of the group. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. Modifying. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. hotel rooms. After you create a model group. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. you also simplify the modification process. the host group is also updated automatically. you not only simplify their placement. In this exercise. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. 653 . and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and typical office layouts. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. all instances in the building model are updated. Creating. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. For example. and modify repetitive units. The new group is considered nested within the host group. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. When you make changes to a nested group.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. place. or with those working on a different project. In this tutorial. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose.

NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium.rvt. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. enter ZR.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Click in the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and double-click First Floor.

The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. enter Typical Kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . and click OK.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar. click (Group).

8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. select the center control for the group origin. click Modify. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 7 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. expand Model.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . under Groups. right-click Typical Kitchen. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. and click Create Instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group.

16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. 15 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror). select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. clear Copy.14 On the Edit toolbar.

19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click (Rotate).17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. and on the Edit toolbar. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 .

click Modify. as shown. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. one mirrored. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and one rotated.

rvt. you make changes to an instance of a group. Modifying a Group In this exercise.rvt. and click to select it. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. When you finish editing. press TAB to highlight the wall. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. click Save As. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group | 661 . and click Save. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.Save the training file 22 On the File menu.

Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. and click member to group instance. press TAB. select the element. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. NOTE To display an excluded element. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and click to select the wall. 7 Click (Group Member. click Modify.). This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. press TAB.3 Click (Group Member. 8 On the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor over the door. and click to select the door.).).

13 On the Design Bar. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. move the cursor to the left. click Modify.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. 10 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar.127mm. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Door. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. select Basic Wall : Generic . Modifying a Group | 663 . clear Tag on Placement. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. 14 In the Type Selector.

move the cursor up. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 23 In the drawing area. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. All other elements in the model are grayed out. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. In edit group mode. click Edit Group. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style.17 On the Design Bar.

click 28 For Base Offset. enter 2134. under Constraints. (Element Properties). to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. for Unconnected Height. enter 1000. 29 On the group editor toolbar. you add the Typical Kitchen group. 26 Select the opening. Nesting Groups In this exercise. Nesting Groups | 665 . The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. and click OK.25 On the Design Bar. click Finish. and on the Options Bar. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. created in an earlier lesson. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. which acts as the host. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save.

m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. click (Add to Group). double-click First Floor. click Edit Group. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 5 In the drawing area. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. in the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the Typical Kitchen group. 4 On the group editor toolbar.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.

8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.6 Press TAB. click Finish. and each of the bifold doors. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. Nesting Groups | 667 . 7 On the group editor toolbar. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. double-click Second Floor. select the wall between the folding doors.

Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you add door tags to a group. such as text. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. such as door and window tags. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. and filled regions. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. under Floor Plans. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. double-click First Floor. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the next exercise. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements.

4 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click to draw a rectangular region. and select a point below the left elevator. click Finish Sketch. click Filled Region.

14 On the Edit toolbar. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click (Group). click to add an arc leader. click Text. as shown. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 9 On the Options Bar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 12 Enter Tile. 16 In the drawing area. click Modify. and on the Design Bar. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. and select the text note and the filled region. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. and click OK.

you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Floor Plans. 22 On the Design Bar. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. under Groups. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. expand Detail. and click Create Instance. double-click Second Floor. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . Because the detail group contains variables. 20 In the Project Browser.18 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify.rvt. under Floor Plans. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 3 On the Options Bar. as shown. 5 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different.manner that a drawing component can be added. double-click First Floor. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area.

enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. select Door Tags. double-click Second Floor. 8 In the Filter dialog. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. click Check None. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and click OK. and click OK. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . for Attached Detail Group Name. click (Filter Selection).7 On the Options Bar. click (Group). expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser.

click Modify.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. and click OK. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 14 On the Options Bar. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. 16 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. click Place Detail. When you load the group from the library into a new project. therefore.

click OK. verify that Same as group name is selected. 12 On the Design Bar. 5 In the New Project dialog.rvt. and expand Model. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. and click Create Instance. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. accept the default template file. A warning dialog displays. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. select 2 Bedroom Unit. browse to the Desktop. 3 For File name. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. expand Groups. verify that Project is selected. under Groups\Model.rvt. click Modify. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . click Desktop. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. and click Save. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. In this case.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. for Create new. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click Save Group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Open. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click OK. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used.

click Use Existing. 18 In the Project Browser. 23 In the confirmation dialog. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Remove Link. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 24 In the message dialog.rvt. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt file is added as a link to the project. click Training Files. click Bind. select the linked Revit model. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and on the Options Bar. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Link. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. and the link is removed. expand Revit Links. and click OK. 20 On the Options Bar. verify that Attached Details is selected only. When a group is converted to a link. click OK.

677 . islands. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data.Site 19 In this tutorial. convert the data to a table. Using Site Tools In this lesson. and walkways. and then modify the data. you add a building pad to the site. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. You add property lines manually. In the final exercises. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface.

and click Site. right-click in the Design Bar.rvt. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. and double-click Site. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. and open Metric\m_First_Project. Using the first method. you create a toposurface using two different methods. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Toposurface. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. This project file was created using the default metric template. 4 On the Options Bar. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. In the second part of this exercise. click Training Files. click Point. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. 3 On the Design Bar. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Creating a Toposurface | 679 . A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Use the following illustration as a reference. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration.

8 On the Options Bar. 15000mm. click Finish Surface. and 18000mm absolute elevations. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. 12000mm. under Additional Contours. click Site Settings. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . 12 On the Settings menu. under Increment. and click OK. enter 1500mm. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. 11 On the Design Bar. Use the following illustration as a reference.

20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. and double-click South. click Modify. and press ENTER.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 19 On the Design Bar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 14 On the View toolbar. 16 On the View toolbar. Before importing the contour data. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click to delete it. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . 18 In the Project Browser. on the Standard toolbar. click to view it at various angles. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click (Default 3D View). click the elevation value. under Views (all). (SteeringWheels). modify the level names and elevations. enter 1000mm. 15 On the View Control Bar.

You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 29 Select the imported topography. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. 24 In the Project Browser. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 28 On the Design Bar. rename the level Base Site Elevation. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. it is considered an import symbol. and press ENTER. click Training Files. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. select Specify. under Floor Plans. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Verify that Current view only is not selected. Click Open. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. click Modify. click Yes. and press ENTER. For Colors. select Preserve. double-click Site. For Layers. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. 23 Click the Level 1 text. 30 On the Edit menu. rename the level Basement. and click OK. under Views (all). click Pin Position. Until it is exploded.21 Click the Level 2 text. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved.

Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. clear Elevations. when the edges highlight. and then click OK. click the Annotation Categories tab. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. When you select the import symbol. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. clear C_INDX. 36 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics.31 On the Design Bar. 34 Under Visibility. click Modify. 32 On the View menu. select it. click Toposurface. and click OK. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance.

rvt. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. click (Default 3D View). this project file is required in its current state. Using the second method. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Using the first method. name the project Site-in progress. click (SteeringWheels). you add property lines using two methods. Adding Property Lines on page 684. 40 On the View toolbar. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . and click Save. 39 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 42 On the View toolbar. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Finish Surface.

On the Design Bar. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Click Modify. Select and delete the right vertical line. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click Lines. click Lines. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. select Create property lines by sketching. do so before continuing. and click OK. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. 4 On the Design Bar.rvt. under Floor Plans. double-click Site.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. click Property Line. Adding Property Lines | 685 . 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Site-in progress.

click Finish Sketch. when they highlight. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. select Edit Table. to delete them. and click OK. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. on the Standard toolbar. click Property Line. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. 9 In the warning dialog. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. 8 On the Options Bar. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. add an arc line on the right. click OK. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. select the lines. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. click 12 On the Design Bar. click OK. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. A warning dialog is displayed.

click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 19 In the Tags dialog. click to place the property lines. This means there is no gap in the property lines. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. 16 Click OK. 15 Starting in Row #1. If the gap is not closed. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu.14 In the Property Lines dialog. Adding Property Lines | 687 .

and click Drafting. In the final step. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. 27 On the Options Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 22 In the Tags dialog. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. 30 On the View Control Bar.rfa. and click OK. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. 23 On the View menu.20 Click Load. The tags display more prominently in this view. 25 Under Visibility. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. In this exercise. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click to place it. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. In the next exercise. click the Imported Categories tab. you created two sets of property lines. clear Leader. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. this project file is required in its current state.dwg and click OK. click Training Files. click Tag ➤ By Category. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. Before adding property line segment tags.

0mm. Under Range Type. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Under Line Pattern.rvt. enter the name Working Contour. under Contour Line Display.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. select Dash dot. Site-in progress. select Working Contour. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. click Object Styles. enter 1000. Under Line Color. click New. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. select Topography. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. 2 On the Settings menu. click Site Settings. 10 Under Additional Contours. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. 7 Click OK. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. In the Object Styles dialog. and click OK. select a shade of Brown. Under Subcategory. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. select Single Value. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. for Subcategory. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1.

and islands. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. The next exercise requires a new training file. Working Contour. you create topographic subregions to define roads. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. such as material. In this exercise. and islands. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. you create subregions in order to define roads. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. parking areas. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. In the next exercise. parking areas.11 Click OK. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. The object style subcategory. 690 | Chapter 19 Site .

click Lines.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. try to replicate the location and proportion. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Subregion. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. Although the exact dimensions are not important. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. click Training Files.rvt. and open Metric\m_Site.

7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 6 In the Materials dialog.Tarmacadam for Name. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . When you finish the sketch in a later step. and click OK. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. under Identity Data. click the value for Material. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Site . the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography.NOTE In the Metric training file. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. click Properties. enter Parking for Name. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. and click to open the Materials dialog.

expand Schedules/Quantities. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch.Tarmacadam. 14 On the Options Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. double-click Site. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. they display within this schedule. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. and double-click Topography Schedule. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. As you create new subregions. 12 On the View Control Bar. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. click Edit Boundary.9 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

694 | Chapter 19 Site . under Floor Plans. Notice that the project area has increased.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Subregion. 18 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. In this training project. double-click Site. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 22 On the Design Bar. Within each subregion. 17 On the View Control Bar. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click Topography Schedule. click Lines. 20 On the View Control Bar. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. Delete overlapping lines. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. click Finish Sketch.

25 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Materials dialog. and click OK.Grass for Name. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 29 On the View Control Bar. enter Island . Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . 27 In the Element Properties dialog. select Site . Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. click the value for Material. and click OK. 30 In the Project Browser. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. click Properties. under Materials and Finishes. click Finish Sketch. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 28 On the Design Bar. and click to open the Materials dialog.Grass for Name. under Identity Data. double-click Topography Schedule.23 In the upper-right parking area. under Schedules/Quantities. 24 On the Design Bar.

Grass. 32 In the Project Browser. Name the subregion Walkway. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . 34 On the Design Bar. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. click Lines. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. Using the techniques learned in previous steps.31 In the Project Browser. Name each region Island Grass. Notice that the schedule has been updated.walkway. You must sketch each region separately. and apply the material Site . under Floor Plans. click Subregion. 35 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. double-click Topography Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities.

double-click Topography Schedule. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. under Schedules/Quantities. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . click Finish Sketch. 37 On the Design Bar. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. Notice that the schedule has been updated. there is still only one toposurface. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. 38 In the Project Browser.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. When you use the grading tool. double-click Site. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. under Floor Plans.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Save. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Select the toposurface. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. Site tutorial-in progress. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Grading the Toposurface on page 698.rvt. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points.

Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. select Copy Internal Points. select Existing for Phase Created. see the tutorial. A warning dialog is displayed. and click Select and Edit. click Modify. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. and click OK. click (Element Properties). 5 On the Design Bar. under Phasing. click Graded Region. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface.3 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the topographic surface. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . Using Phasing on page 761. Notice that the toposurface displays differently.

700 | Chapter 19 Site . 10 Press DELETE.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.

12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. demolished.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. Grading the Toposurface | 701 . 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and new.

specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 18 On the View toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 17 On the Design Bar.13 Press DELETE. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). click Finish Surface. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. click Point. 19 On the View Control Bar. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration.

and click OK. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 24 On the View menu. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. only the original toposurface displays.20 On the View toolbar. click View Properties. under Phasing. click to view it at various angles. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. specify New Construction for Phase. When you add a building pad. under Phasing. Therefore. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. this project file is required in its current state. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. you can delete it. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . click View Properties. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a building pad. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. specify Existing for Phase. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. (SteeringWheels). A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. 23 Select the toposurface. and delete it. Only the graded topography displays. and click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.

704 | Chapter 19 Site . 6 On the Design Bar. click Pad.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. the Pick Walls command is active. 4 On the Design Bar. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. Site tutorial-in progress. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. If you have an existing building model. NOTE By default. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. under Floor Plans.rvt. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 2 On the View Control Bar. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration.

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click (SteeringWheels). Notice the new building pad. 9 On the View toolbar. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. this project file is required in its current state. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 On the View toolbar. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click (Default 3D View). 7 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Adding Site Components on page 706. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch.

and select the parking space. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm .90 deg. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.rvt.Adding Site Components In this exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. 3 In the Type Selector. click Modify. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 5 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Parking Component. double-click Site.

click (Default 3D View). TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. Adding Site Components | 707 . 8 On the View toolbar.

11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.9 On the View toolbar. Notice the new parking spaces. 12 In the Type Selector. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. click Site Component. double-click Site. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . choose any tree type. under Floor Plans.

the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. click (Default 3D View). Adding Site Components | 709 . 15 On the View toolbar. 14 On the View toolbar. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. In the following illustration. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click (SteeringWheels).

6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. click Apply. click Tag All Not Tagged. and click OK. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the View menu. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. click Hidden Line. Site tutorial-in progress. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710.rvt. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. double-click Site. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Apply. this project file is required in its current state. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.

verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. Click again to the left to position the leader. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. as shown: 10 Using the same method.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Click up and to the left. outside of the site. 8 On the Options Bar. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . In the following exercise. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. to position the shoulder of the leader. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance.

11 On the Design Bar. and select the 3 spot dimensions. click Modify. 12 Press and hold CTRL. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive.

14 On the Design Bar. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state.■ Clear Leader. click Modify. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713.

select Mark. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . and click Add. double-click Site. 7 Under Fields. enter Size. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Window menu. and click OK. The parking schedule is displayed. under Space. If necessary. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Tile. 8 Under Fields. 11 On the Window menu. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Parking for Category. click Schedule/Quantities.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. and click OK. click the Fields tab.rvt. 6 Click the Formatting tab. and under Heading. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 5 Under Available fields. click Close Hidden Windows. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. select Mark. 12 In the Site plan. and click Add. and under Heading. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. enter Space. 4 Under Available fields. select Type. select Type. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. under Views (all). 13 In the Parking Schedule. Site tutorial-in progress. number the first three spaces consecutively. under Floor Plans.

Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. under Space. 14 In the Parking Schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . finish numbering the remaining spaces. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. This allows you to know which space you are numbering.

716 .

you specify an active workset. When you are working on a shared project. you must first enable Worksharing. such as walls. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. The first time you activate worksets within a project. select the desired workset. Working in a shared project In a shared project. To make a workset editable. and so on. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. however. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. Elements specific to a view. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. such as annotations and dimensions. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. called Worksharing. they cannot make changes to it. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. All other team members can view this workset. Using Worksharing. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. After the project is shared. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. and click Editable. floors. You can enable Worksharing for any project. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. In this tutorial. go to the Worksets dialog. 717 . stairs. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. A workset is a collection of building elements. use Element Borrowing. doors.

You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. After learning the fundamentals. In the lessons and exercises that follow. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. Instead. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Team size 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. such as a tenant interior. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. In the next exercise. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. When setting up Worksharing. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you can select which worksets are open or closed. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. In a multi-story structure.

On this tab. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. In most projects.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Experience has shown that. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. not including the Project Standards. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. As new members create worksets for their own use. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. You should have at least one workset for each person. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. designers work in teams. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Shared Levels and Grids. with each assigned a specific functional task. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. and View worksets. Regardless of the default setting. When you create a new workset. for a typical project. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. When creating the new worksets. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Team member roles Typically.

you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. When you save locally (to your local file). you make that workset editable by you. When you save to the central file. When you save to the central file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. proceeds as usual. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. On the Options Bar. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. you can select which workset is active. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. However. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. Generally. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. within the local file. This makes them available to other team members. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. your changes propagate to the entire team. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. Therefore. As you work. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. if a workset named Interior was created. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. This is called “Selective Open. For example. When finished or at regular intervals. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. however. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. your changes are saved. the file is saved as the central file. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. you should then save to your local file. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. After saving to the central file.

using VPN. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. for instance. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you should check out the Materials workset. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . When working remotely. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you work no differently then you would in the office. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. and then save the local file. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. reload the latest changes from the central file. if you know who checked out the required workset. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. In this situation. In this conceptual exercise. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. Alternatively. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. make any required worksets editable. In this instance. save to the central file. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. To do this. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. and make that workset editable.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you enable Worksharing within an existing project.rvt. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Your username displays as the present owner. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. The Worksets dialog displays. under Show. and notice all are editable by you. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. click Worksets. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 3 In the Worksets dialog. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. and open Common\c_Worksets.In the next exercise. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.

Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . Therefore. you can rename the default workset. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Because the interior walls appear in many views. In this training file. 14 In the Worksets dialog. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. In this case. When you initially activate Worksharing. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. Project Standards. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. select Workset1. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. 12 Click Rename. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. ■ 5 Under Show. and double-click Level 1. 13 In the Rename dialog. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. click New. 8 Click OK. another is assigned the interior layout. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. and Views. For training purposes. type the name Exterior Shell. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. You do. In this simple training project. it is better to make them visible by default. Only User-Created worksets should display. and click OK. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. click OK. imagine four users including yourself. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. clear Visible by default in all views. clear Families. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. For example. expand Views (all). The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. however. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. 9 Click New.When you enable worksharing. expand Floor Plans. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. currently named Workset1. 16 In the drawing area. a small number of team members are working on the building model. 11 In the Worksets dialog. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets.

TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. and walls. 23 Select all of the interior elements. select Interior Layout for Workset. 24 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. and click OK. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 29 Click OK. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 21 On the Options Bar. select Interior Layout for Workset. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the View menu. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.17 On the Options Bar. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. click . 19 Click OK. under Identity Data. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click Visibility/Graphics. under Identity Data. 20 Select one of the interior walls. including the interior doors. click . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. click . stairs. click the Worksets tab.

31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click . 33 In the Project Browser. you enabled Worksharing on a project. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. under Views (all). select all of the interior elements of the building model. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. under Identity Data. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. and click OK. double-click Level 2. 41 In the Worksets dialog. click Non Editable. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. click Save As. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . click Visibility/Graphics. 44 On the File menu. 30 On the View menu. 32 Select Interior Layout. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. Now that you have created the central file. click the Worksets tab. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. 34 In the drawing area. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. make sure you remember the location of this central file. If any interior elements remain. 43 Click OK.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. select Interior Layout for Workset. 38 In the Save As dialog. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Click Save. 35 On the Options Bar. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. click Close. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. In this exercise. click Worksets. 42 On the right side of the dialog. and click OK.

The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. select Interior Layout for Name. please do so before continuing. 6 On the File menu. 4 Click Open. click Save As. and double-click Level 1. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and select Specify. expand Floor Plans. 15 In the Project Browser. click Worksets. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. make modifications to the building model. and click OK. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. click Options. and click Save. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. click Open. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. expand Views (all). You have created a local file which is for your use only. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. select Interior Layout. select all the User-Created worksets. Next. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 7 In the Save As dialog. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. you create your local file. 12 Click OK. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. and select Yes for Editable. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. In addition. If you have not yet completed the exercise. Before working on the model. check out worksets. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. and click OK. 13 On the Window menu. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select the central file. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. In this case. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. 2 In the Open dialog.

17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. notice the Editable Only option. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Verify that it is cleared. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 23 On the File menu. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. In the Worksets dialog. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. click Modify. 24 Click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. click Worksets. 21 On the Options Bar. Because this element is not owned by another user. click . you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. On the Options Bar. 20 Under Constraints. you can still edit this wall. 18 On the Options Bar. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. click . however. and click OK. under Identity Data. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . 22 Click OK. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. If this is selected.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. If it was owned by another user. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. In this case. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes.

select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 29 In the Type Selector. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. click Door. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 34 In the Type Selector. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 26 Delete the door. select Basic Wall: Interior . 30 Using the following illustration as a guide.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .126mm Partition (2-hr). click Wall. The precise location is not important. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 31 On the Design Bar. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner.

Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. please do so before continuing. For training purposes. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. a tooltip. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. Throughout the process. and save locally immediately afterward. In this exercise. you should relinquish all worksets. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. In this particular case. make elements editable. Borrowed Elements is selected. checked out worksets. you should perform regular saves. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. two users access the central file through a network connection. add two door openings into the rooms you created. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. By default. You modified the building model. 37 In the Save to Central dialog.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. When working in your local file. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. you created your local file. leave this file open in its current state. click Save to Central. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. In addition. and reload the latest changes. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. If you have not yet completed these exercises. each user must check out worksets. save to central. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. At the end of a work session. it is recommended. displays the workset as well as the element type. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. which matches the information in the Status Bar. Whenever you save. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise.

3 On the Settings menu. This is a system setting. and click OK. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. select the central file. enter User 2. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. click Options. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. and select Specify. This file is for your use only. consider that person to be User 1. under Username. 9 Click Open. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. return to the Settings dialog. 7 In the Open dialog. and click OK. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and select Yes for Editable. You now have a local copy of the project. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. 4 Click the General Tab and. 15 On the File menu. instructions are staggered.rvt. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. click Options. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. and click Save. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. In the following section of this exercise. click Worksets. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 12 In the Save As dialog. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. User 2: Create a local file. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. For training purposes. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. click Save As. skip the following section. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). In addition. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. click Open. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. one user has already created a local file. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. and proceed to Creating a local copy. 11 On the File menu. specifically sequenced. select all the User-Created worksets.

23 Click OK. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. expand Floor Plans. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 17 Click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. If it is not open. it becomes the active workset.You are now the owner of that workset. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 27 On the File menu. User 1: Check out worksets. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. expand Views (all). 28 In the Save to Central dialog. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. click Save to Central. If you only have one workset checked out. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. click Worksets. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. 19 On the File menu. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout.” 29 Click OK. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. select the lower exterior wall. and select Yes for Editable. modify the building model. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. open it now. expand Floor Plans.

Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. click Worksets. 37 On the File menu. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. click Reload Latest. Click Yes. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. and click Rename. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. 45 In the Rename View dialog. under Views (all). and click OK. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. However. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. 46 In the Project Browser. you should create a furniture plan view.” 35 Click OK. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 43 In the Project Browser. click Save to Central. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. 33 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. The changes User 2 made are apparent. right-click Level 1. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. and click OK.” 39 Click OK. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. under Floor Plans. 42 Select Furniture Layout. 41 On the File menu. click Save to Central. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. User 1: Reload latest worksets. Before adding any furniture. select Yes for Editable. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. under Floor Plans. When you save to central. 44 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything.

under Show.” 55 Click OK. 48 In the Type Selector. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. the Visible by default option was not selected. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. and click Element Properties. click Worksets. click Rename. NOTE System families. 50 On the View menu. click Modify. 65 Click OK.200mm. 53 On the File menu. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select Project Standards. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. 63 In the Worksets dialog. choose any desk. click the Worksets tab. are placed under Project Standards. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. and click inside any room. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 61 Click OK 2 times. 49 On the Design Bar. Therefore. rather than Families. 66 On the File menu. click Component. and click OK. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 62 On the File menu. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. enter Exterior Wall . 60 In the Rename dialog. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. click Save to Central. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . such as Wall Types. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. click Edit/New. click Reload Latest. click Save to Central. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK.

proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. At the appropriate point in this exercise. This exercise requires two users and. select Save to Central. select the following. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). As each of you work. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. and save 69 On the File menu. leave this file open in its current state. In the final exercise of this tutorial. click Save As. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. click Training Files. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. and these problems are rectified. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. and published their changes back to the central file.rvt. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you save the training file as a central file. and click OK. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. select Reload Latest. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. leave this file open in its current state. you need to set up your central and local files. throughout this training. and still have your local files open. 70 On the File menu. 3 In the Save As dialog. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Each user checked out worksets. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. modified the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Options. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. There are specific instructions for each user. In subsequent steps. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. User 1: Reload latest. finished the previous workset exercises. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. Each user must have network access to the central file. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. Checking out worksets.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them.

verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 17 On the File menu. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. You have created a local file which is for your use only. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. and select Specify. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 18 In the Save As dialog. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. Set the Username to User 2. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. 15 Click Open. 12 On the File menu. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and click Save. This is a system setting. 6 On the File menu. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. click Save As. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. and click OK. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. select the central file. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. click Options. Next.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 8 In the Save As dialog. click Options. and click OK. On the Settings menu. click Options. return to the Settings dialog. and click Save. This is the local file for User 1. 13 In the Open dialog. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 5 Click Save. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. The central file should still be open. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . select Make this a Central File after save. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. In addition. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and click OK. and click OK. click Save As. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. click Open.

27 Under Active Workset. After you submit the request.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. and click Open. select Interior Layout. and then click OK. select the second window from the top. click Worksets. 29 On the Options Bar. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. and select Yes for Editable. double-click Level 1. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. under Floor Plans. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. 22 In the Worksets dialog. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. select them. You are now the owner of that workset. select the Interior Layout workset. You are now the owner of that workset. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select Exterior Shell. 30 On the left exterior wall. click Worksets. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. verify that Editable Only is cleared. 26 In the Worksets dialog. click the File menu. and select Yes for Editable. Afterwards. and click Editing Requests. if any User-Created worksets are not open. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 24 Under Active Workset. At this point. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own.

and the other user granted it. and notice the window is in the new location. 35 Click Grant. 36 Click Close. In this case. and click OK. you requested permission to edit the element. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. A message informs you that your request has been granted. select Save to Central. to Local. select the following. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. In this multi-user exercise. click Check Now. and close 39 On the File menu. select the request submitted by User 2. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. click Close. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 .34 In the Editing Requests dialog. 38 Click OK. 40 In the Save to Central dialog.

738 .

After you and the client agree on the final design. and each option set can have multiple schemes. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can have multiple sets of design options. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. 739 . At any time in the design process. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. In addition. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. For example. Using design options. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. In this tutorial.

the roof and structure systems must work together. make your final design decision. TIP In this exercise. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. you set up multiple design option sets. you design each of the structural options. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . In the left pane of the Open dialog. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. With the second option. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. The client has asked you to create various options. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). each is constructed for interchangeability. click New. each with multiple design options. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the only available command is to create a new option set.In this particular case. After you create a design option. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. click Training Files. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. In the final exercise of this lesson. under Option Set. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. and delete the unwanted options from the project. and open Metric\m_Urban_House.rvt. In the first exercise in this lesson. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. you can edit it. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. In the second exercise. 2 In the Design Options dialog. therefore. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu.

click Edit Selected. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. 4 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Edit toolbar. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. or add a dimension string between the columns. expand Views (all). Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. 7 In the Type Selector. and the third column centered between the two. TIP To center the middle column. click Modify. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls.3 Select Option 1 (primary). Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. add three columns. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. By selecting Multiple. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. and click Close. click 12 On the Options Bar. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. 9 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In this case. expand Floor Plans. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. select: ■ ■ ■ . 5 On the View menu. click Column. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option.

the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. using the same technique. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 18 On the View toolbar. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. When you are finished. click . TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. Because of the size of the columns. they are difficult to see in this view. 17 Zoom out and. In the following illustration. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. A copy of the three selected columns is added.

under Floor Plans. click Modify. Adding a beam is a two-click process. double-click TOP OF CORE. 19 In the Project Browser. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. click Beam. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Next. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. select Round Bar : 50mm. The second click specifies the end of the beam. 23 On the Design Bar. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Zoom in on the upper right column. and click at its center to set the beam start point. The first click specifies the beam start point. In it. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 21 In the Type Selector. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. Use the following illustration as a guide. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . you add the beams that span the columns.Notice the 12 columns that you added.

move down to the next set of columns. 30 On the View toolbar. click . 28 Zoom out. select: ■ ■ ■ .25 On the Edit toolbar. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. and select the center of the column to add a copy. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click 26 On the Options Bar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. zoom into the left column. and click the center point.

32 In the Design Options dialog. 43 In the Rename dialog. under Option Set. click Rename. and click OK.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. click Rename. enter Beam for New. under Option. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 36 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. 34 In the Design Options dialog. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 37 Select Option 2 and. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 45 Under Roofing. name the option Louvers. enter Structure for New. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). click Rename. under Option. 46 Under Option. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 40 In the Rename dialog. 38 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. enter Roofing for New. 33 Click Finish Editing. under Option. under Option Set. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. and click OK. 41 Under Option Set. click New. enter Brackets for New. under Option. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. There should now be two roofing design options. and click OK. click New. and click OK. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. click New. select Option 1 (primary). not a new option set.

54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. under Structure. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 53 In the Project Browser. 52 Click Close.47 Under Roofing. and click OK. you create the second design option. This allows you to more easily manage the project. double-click ROOF TERRACE. it will resemble the following illustration. 50 In the Design Options dialog. 48 Under Option. click Rename. Under Now Editing. name the option Sunscreen. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under Floor Plans. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. select Edit Selected. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. select Option 2. 51 Under Edit. select Beam. When finished.

click Align. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Refer to the following illustration. 58 On the Tools menu. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 56 In the Type Selector. click Component.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Roof Beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 .

65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. The first click sets the move start point. on the Edit toolbar. click Modify. 61 On the Design Bar. 62 Select the beam and. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .60 After aligning the beam. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click to indicate the end point of the move. The second click represents the move end point. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment.

name the file. 69 Click Close. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . which is visible by default. 66 On the View toolbar. click Finish Editing. click Save As. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. 68 In the Design Options dialog. and click Save. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. you need this file in its current state. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 70 On the File menu.rvt. m_Urban_House-in progress. click . Notice that even before you close the dialog. 67 On the Tools menu.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam.

In this exercise. select Louvers (primary). All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. 3 In the Design Options dialog. delete them after the rafter is in place. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and double-click TOP OF CORE. 2 On the Tools menu. The first option. 5 Click Close. a Louver system. the other for beams.rvt. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. Under Now Editing. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. 10 Referring to the following illustration. click Component. click Edit Selected. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 8 In the Type Selector. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. you set up multiple design option sets. expand Floor Plans. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . If you need to add dimensions. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. under Roofing. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. 4 Under Edit. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. expand Views (all). you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. The second roofing system. Sunscreen. 6 In the Project Browser. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. With the second option. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. open it now. you design each of the roofing options. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. In the next exercise. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. do so now. each with multiple design options to pick from. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets.

13 On the Options Bar. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. enter 11750 mm for Length. click Modify. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . Select Constrain. 15 On the Edit menu. and click OK. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. under Other. Select 2nd for Move To. click . Enter 5 for Number. click Array.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. 16 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.

18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. and press ENTER. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 990. when the listening dimension displays.

27 For the array starting point. under Other. enter 5475 mm for Length. and select the louver you just placed. 20 In the Type Selector. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. 22 On the Design Bar. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. click the Edit menu. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. and click OK. Select 2nd for Move To.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the Options Bar. Enter 34 for Number. and click Array. Select Constrain. 25 With the louver still selected. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . click Modify. click Component. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 23 On the Options Bar.

Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. 29 On the View toolbar. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 300. when the listening dimension displays. click . and.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. and press Enter.

you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. click Finish Editing. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name.The louver roof system is complete. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. 33 Under Editing. under Edit. 40 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK. Click OK. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 30 On the Tools menu. under Roofing. click Edit Selected. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. 39 On the Design Bar. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 34 In the Project Browser. click Lines. Therefore. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. expand Elevations. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and then click Close. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . select Sunscreen. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. 31 In the Design Options dialog. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. In this case. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click West. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it.

Under Constraints. 49 On the View toolbar. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. click Finish Sketch. then you can modify it through the dimension. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and the third point defines the arc. 43 On the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. click Trim/Extend. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. the top of the next column on the right. then the center arc. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. click . click Properties. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. 48 On the Design Bar. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. Select the right arc. You will fix this in a later step. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. 46 On the Tools menu. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. The arcs should connect. The first two points define the ends of the line. Under Constraints. 45 Click OK. 41 Select the top of the left column. NOTE As you sketch the arcs.

The louver roof system is complete. enter Primary Option. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. The first option. under Edit. do so now. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. secondary. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 51 In the Design Options dialog. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. 52 On the File menu. 50 On the Tools menu. under Views (all). You have completed the sunscreen roof system. In this exercise. and delete the discarded design options. Sunscreen. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. click Save. and click Duplicate. Managing Design Options | 757 . 4 In the Project Browser. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. click Finish Editing. make it part of the building model. you need this file in its current state. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you select a design. Managing Design Options In this exercise. right-click {3D}. under Views (all). The second roofing system. After exploring the combinations. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. and click OK. tertiary. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. and last options. 2 In the Project Browser. a Louver system. expand 3D Views. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. you designed each of the roofing options. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. and then click Close. under 3D Views. and click Rename.

758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 7 On the View menu. under 3D Views. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. double-click Secondary Option. under Views (all). Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. and click OK.5 Right-click each of the copies. 9 Click OK. and click Rename. 11 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Primary Option. click the Design Options tab. click the Design Options tab. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). under 3D Views. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

Managing Design Options | 759 . 19 On the View menu. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. under Views (all). all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. click Visibility/Graphics. 18 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. At this point. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. In this case. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 15 On the View menu. under 3D Views.14 In the Project Browser. double-click Tertiary Option. double-click Last Option. In your design options. under 3D Views. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under Views (all).

and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. 24 Under Option. In this exercise. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. The set is deleted. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 25 Select Structure. the beam option becomes part of the model. click Close. select Beam. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Delete to remove the views that used options. made it part of the building model. select Make Primary. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. double-click Primary Option. 33 In the Design Options dialog. since you no longer need them. Because the client has selected the design option. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. This was the client choice for structural. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 31 In the alert dialog. 29 Select Roofing.22 On the Tools menu. click Accept Primary. 30 Under Option Set. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 35 On the File menu. click Yes. 27 In the alert dialog. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. the current primaries are no longer options. you selected a design. After exploring the combinations. click Save. click Yes. under Structure. 26 Under Option Set. click Delete. and deleted the discarded design options. but should be accepted as part of the building model. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. An alert is displayed.

Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. then add new walls and doors in a different location. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. complete with schedules. In the second exercise. This changes room definition and total building model area. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. In the lesson and exercises that follow. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. demolish existing construction. You create new phases. and then add new building model elements. In the second exercise. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. 761 . demolish existing walls and doors. For the client. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases.Project Phasing 22 In any project. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new phases. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases.

This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When you create a new project. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. 6 On the Options Bar. are visible in this view. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. In the Element Properties dialog. As you add new elements to the building model. click Training Files. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. and double-click Level 1. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. under Phasing.rvt. and None is selected for Phase Demolished.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. regardless of phase. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Phasing. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 Click Cancel. under Phasing. click Project Units. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. During the demolition and renovation process. expand Views (all). two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. If you wish to do so. 7 Click Cancel. click Modify. go to the Settings menu. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. click (Element Properties). This means that all building model elements. you do not need to change the project units to metric. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. define the units.

17 Click No. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. 11 In the Filter dialog. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. 10 On the Options Bar. enter Level 1 . and click OK. select Existing. enter Level 1 . 19 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Rename dialog. 14 On the Design Bar. and click OK. are highlighted in red. After you create the views. and click Rename. 16 In the Rename dialog. Phasing Your Model | 763 .Existing. under Phasing. for Phase Created.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. After you release the mouse button. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific.Demo.Existing. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Because this is a phase-specific view. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1. and click OK. click . right-click Level 1 . 12 On the Options Bar. including the door tags. and click Rename. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. TIP If this were a multi-story building. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Modify. all of the building model elements. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.Existing. under Floor Plans. Because this is a renovation project. clear Door Tags. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click (Filter Selection). right-click Copy of Level 1 .

View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. 29 For Composite Plan. 28 Under Filter Name. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . to which all the building model elements belong. and click OK. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. for Phase. double-click Level 1 . You may need to zoom in to see this.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. Demolished. under Floor Plans. Later in this exercise. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. Phase status is time-dependent. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. under New. and Temporary. Existing. 24 In the Project Browser. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. In this case. Because of this time relationship. select Existing. under Floor Plans. enter Composite Plan. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. you modify these settings. There are five default phase filters. 21 In the Project Browser. select Overridden. however. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. double-click Level 1 . Next. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. On a logical time line. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object.Existing. new construction occurs after existing construction. under Phasing. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Phasing dialog. click the Phase Filters tab.Demo. 27 Click New.

select the line style. select Demolished. under Floor Plans. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. click OK. double-click Level 1 . Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog.Demo. When you demolish the host. click (Demolish). Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. click the value for Color. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. As you click each wall. its display changes to a red dashed line. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. double-click Level 1 . 34 In the Color dialog. or you can use the demolish tool. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. you begin demolition. 32 In the Demolished row. under Cut ➤ Lines. Phasing Your Model | 765 . select the interior walls one at a time. select a lighter blue. 39 In the Phasing dialog. Next. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. select red. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. you demolish all elements hosted by it.31 Under Phase Status. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. 42 In the Project Browser. 35 Click OK twice. There are two ways to demolish an element. 36 Using the same method. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. under Floor Plans. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps.Existing.

52 Open Level 1 . select Basic Wall: Interior . 51 Add a door leading into each room. 47 In the Type Selector. click Wall. for Phase Filter. under Phasing.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). and click OK. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter.Demo. 50 In the Type Selector. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . for Phase Filter. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. add a long horizontal wall. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. select Show Previous + New. click Door. 49 On the Design Bar.Existing. The demolished walls no longer display. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84".44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Phasing. 53 Open Level 1 . 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . 61 On the View Control Bar. 57 In the Project Browser. The renovated building model plan is displayed. Phasing Your Model | 767 . new is shown in blue.New.New. 62 If necessary. right-click Level 1 . Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and existing shows as half-tone. regardless of phase. because the phase filter is set to Show All.Demo. click (Default 3D View). All elements are displayed in this view. 60 On the View toolbar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New).The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. 59 Open Level 1 . which are displayed as red. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans.

All room boundaries are phase-specific. therefore. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases.rvt.New.Demo. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. go to the Settings menu. In this view. you do not need to change the project units to metric. the rooms change in both definition and size. define the units. expand Views (all). As the renovation process continues. and new construction. You can also see that the room quantities.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. 2 Open Level 1 . In this exercise. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. you can do so at this time. and click OK. you can see the new walls added to the building model. sizes. Notice that this view is the original building model. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. and double-click Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. demolition. If you wish to do so. If you wish to save this file. click Training Files. 63 Close the file. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . and locations change depending on the phase of the project. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. In this view. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. click Project Units. expand Floor Plans. In the next exercise. 3 Open Level 1 . and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly.Existing.

Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 .New. 9 On the Design Bar. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. In the Phasing dialog. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click OK.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. click Modify. Use the following illustration as a guide.Existing. yet they have different room numbers. 11 On the Design Bar. click Room. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.Demo. click in each room as you move to the right. 10 Open Level 1 . click Room. and maximize the view. 13 Open Level 1 . notice that there are two phases defined in this project. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 6 Open Level 1 . click Room Tag.

Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. 19 On the Window menu. In this case. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. click Tile. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .New Construction. The two schedule views tile.Existing. In this exercise. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. 16 In the Project Browser. 20 Close the file.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. expand Schedules/Quantities. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. In addition. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. 17 On the Window menu. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. View phase-specific room schedules. 18 Open Room Schedule . and double-click Room Schedule . click Close Hidden Windows.

In this tutorial. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. performance. modify their visibility. In the final lesson. This maximizes efficiency. 771 . A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. You position the building models on the site plan. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. In these situations. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. Comparison of alternatives on a site.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. and manage the links throughout the project.

772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . modify their visibility. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. You position the building models on the site.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. One building model is a condominium. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. You link two building models to the project.Linking Building Models In this lesson. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. and the other is a townhouse. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . This center changes as the footprint of your model changes.

and click OK. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. click Open. c_Condo_Complex. RELATED See the lesson. this system is not exposed to the user.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. Auto . NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 4 On the File menu. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. however. with write permission. in the Model Linking folder that you created. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. 5 On the File menu. c_Townhouse.■ Auto . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. click Close. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. click Open. you can do so. 2 On the File menu. and open Common\c_Site. This option is grayed out. this option will place the link at a predefined location. select the three files. Click Open. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . Manual . 8 Clear Read-only.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. click Save As. right-click. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. Otherwise. All three files now reside.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. click Training Files. Select c_Site. ■ ■ Manual . and save the file there.rvt. and click Properties.

13 Click Open. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. expand Floor Plans.Origin to Origin. you do not need to change the project units to metric. click Project Units. select Auto . For Positioning. you can go to the Settings menu. 11 On the File menu.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. Notice the blue detail lines. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. 10 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and make your changes. If you wish to do so. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. and double-click Level 1.

Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 .The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. The first click specifies the move start point. Standard move commands work with linked building models. 15 On the Edit toolbar. The linked model moves as one object. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. 17 For the move endpoint. The second click specifies the move endpoint. After you select it.rvt displays in the Type Selector. click (Move). click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. The Move command requires two clicks. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. 16 For the move start point. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex.

click Import/Link ➤ Revit.Origin to Origin. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. 18 On the View menu. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .After you specify the location to move to. 21 Click Open. For Positioning. select Auto . click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and select c_Townhouse.

25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. click (Rotate). 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. 23 On the Edit toolbar. In this case. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. click to specify the rotation start point. when the vertical line displays. you first specify the rotation start point. and click to specify the end of the rotation. To rotate an object.

Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. click (Move). This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration.

Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . click (Copy). select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. and the second click specifies the copy-to point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. The first click specifies the start point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. 30 For the starting point. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point.

for Name. 32 On the Edit menu. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. click (Default 3D View). 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. 34 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . use the Move command to make any adjustments.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Townhouse A. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. under Identity data. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 37 On the View toolbar. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Rotate.

click Save. you need this project file open and in this view. 2 On the SteeringWheels. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. In this exercise. they were placed too low within the site topography. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. do so before continuing. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. click (SteeringWheels). After linking the files. In the next exercise. click and hold Orbit. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files.38 On the File menu. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. In this exercise. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. When you originally linked the files.

782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . the status bar displays the name of the linked file. 3 In the Project Browser. and click to select it. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. expand Elevations. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. you first select the plane you want to align to. and click to select the line. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. In the steps that follow. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. when it highlights. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. and double-click South. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. Click the Revit Links tab. and click OK. under Views (all). and then select the plane that you want to align. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left.rvt.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. In this case. click (Align). Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. To do this. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. 7 On the Tools toolbar. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. When using the Align command.

align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. under Elevations.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. click Save. click (Default 3D View). and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. double-click North. 12 On the View toolbar. 14 On the SteeringWheels. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. 15 On the File menu. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. (SteeringWheels). This would over-constrain the model. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. click and hold Orbit. 11 Return to the South elevation view. click 13 On the View toolbar. 9 In the Project Browser. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 .

The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. display settings. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. In this exercise. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. click By Host View. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you can independently control the visibility settings. expand c_Townhouse. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. scroll down and clear Levels. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. When you link a file. By linked view. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. click the Revit Links tab. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. If the Basics page is set to Custom.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. click Visibility/Graphics. or Custom. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. and the halftone settings for each linked project. double-click South. As you can see. under Elevations. 9 Under Visibility. click OK. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display.rvt. click Custom. In the next exercise. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. you need this project file open and in this view. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. 2 On the View menu. do so before continuing. select <Custom>. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. 4 Under Visibility. 8 For Annotation Categories. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. 10 Click OK. detail level.

no detail level changes are required. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. or fine. 20 For c_Townhouse. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. on the Basics tab.rvt. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. select Custom. By selecting custom under Model Categories.rvt. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. Using the Custom option. By default. under Display Settings.rvt. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. and click OK. 23 In the Model categories list. click the Revit Links tab. and then set the detail level to coarse. In this case. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. 24 Click OK. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. select <Custom>. 14 On the View menu. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. You can click the value for Detail Level. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. medium. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. 16 Under Visibility. click Visibility/Graphics.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. expand c_Townhouse. click Visibility/Graphics. With linked files. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . click the Revit Links tab. click By Host View. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

existing. In this exercise. With the Show All filter applied. 25 On the Revit Links tab. you need this project file open and in this view. In this case. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 26 Under Display Settings. click Custom for the Townhouse link. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. select c_Townhouse. this is preferable. However. under Visibility. 31 On the File menu. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. on a sloped site for instance. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. and phase filter of a specific link. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. you manage the linked files. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. all new. click OK. demolished.rvt. In most cases. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. By default. In the next exercise. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. phase. click Save. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. 29 Click OK. 28 Select By linked view for View range. there are situations. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. All other components are grayed out. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In this case.

Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. click Yes. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. the link is maintained. 3 Under Path Type. In general. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. In a shared coordinate environment. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. Locations Not Saved. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. click the Revit tab. They supply information regarding the links. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . If you have not completed the previous exercise. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. and Saved Path fields are read only. do so before continuing. 4 Under Linked File. You learn more about this in the next lesson. click Manage Links. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. Notice the Loaded. 5 Click Unload. 7 Click OK.rvt. select c_Condo_Complex.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. 6 At the confirmation prompt. The default path type is Relative.

rvt. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. To do this. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. and click Reload. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. right-click c_Condo_Complex. click Save As. 8 In the Project Browser. However. click the arrow next to the Open button. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. expand Revit Links. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. If you choose not to open that workset. the link is not loaded. When you initially place the link. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. and select Specify. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. In general. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. 9 On the File menu. In these cases. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made.

you are establishing a shared origin point. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. In the next lesson. When you share coordinates between projects. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. name the file Site_Project. The host file consists primarily of site components. and the resulting project files. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. and save it as an RVT file. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files.10 In the Save As dialog. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). do so before continuing. In this exercise. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In essence. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. leave the project file open in its current view. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. When used in conjunction with model linking. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. If you have not completed the previous lesson.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. 2 On the Tools menu. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. do so before continuing. When you are working in the host project. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. As indicated in the Status Bar. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt.rvt and click Open. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. and the resulting project files. Linking Building Models on page 772. open it before continuing. If you have not completed the lesson.coordinates are used. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. click Open. 3 In the drawing area. If you have closed the project. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. In this case. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Select Site_Project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Condo Complex. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file.

Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. 5 On the Design Bar. These three locations can be named Lot A. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. You also relocate the shared origin of the project.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. when the edges highlight. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. click to select it. do so before continuing. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. In this exercise. and Lot C. even though both models originate from one linked file. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. and click OK. but can have multiple additional locations. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. However. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. you need this project file open and in this view. If you have not completed the exercise. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. select Location 1. it is placed at a specific location. On the Status Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. this location is not saved outside of the host project. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . Lot B.

792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. click Not Shared for Shared Location. and click OK. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. click . . This is a one-time operation. In the Choose Location dialog. When constraining a link to a location. 7 In the Rename dialog. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. 9 In the Select Location dialog. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. Record the current position as a location. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Options Bar. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. click Rename. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. select Move instance to.2 On the Options Bar. enter Lot A for New. under Instance Parameters. click Reconcile. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. and click OK. click Not Shared for Shared Location. click Change. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. under Instance Parameters. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. click OK. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. 4 Under Value. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click the Revit tab. 26 Click OK. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. and the left townhouse resides at that location. click OK. ignore the warning. Record current position as. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . or cancel the action. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. enter Lot B for Name. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. select Save. When you relocate a project. a warning displays. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and then select the townhouse project. 16 Click Change. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. 23 Click Save Locations. click Duplicate. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. Notice the OK button is still not active. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. When you create a location.Notice the OK button is not active. The second click specifies the move endpoint. the active location position is moved. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 30 On the Tools menu. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. The first click specifies the move start point. When you release the mouse button. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. Save locations 21 On the File menu. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. you cannot redefine its location. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and click OK. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. click Manage Links. 19 In the Select Location dialog. To explicitly save a location. click OK. and click OK. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. select the second option. make sure Lot B is selected. and click OK. Because Lot A is currently in use. By relocating a project. This is a two-click process. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.

32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. select Save. 33 On the Edit menu. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 36 On the File menu. NOTE In the following exercise. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. and click OK. 34 On the File menu. click Close. you work in one of the linked projects. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. In this exercise. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. click Save.

double-click 1st Floor. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. it is placed automatically within the host project. In this exercise. Select c_Condo_Complex. If you have not completed the exercises. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser.By Shared Coordinates. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Click Open. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position.rvt file. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. click Open. In addition. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. 2 On the File menu. Because this building model only has one named location.rvt file. Also. For Positioning. do so before continuing. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. select Auto . This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. if other models were linked into the same host. The current active location is Lot A. When opening the linked file. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.

Notice that Lot A is the current active location. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. you can select Lot C if necessary. click Duplicate. In the host file. click OK. click Manage Place and Locations. In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. do so before continuing. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. and click Make Current. enter Lot C. 7 Click OK. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. In the next exercise. orient a view to true north. If you have not completed the exercises. and click OK. under Graphics. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. you create a new location. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click View Properties. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and click OK. you manage the shared locations. 6 Select Lot B. you need this project file open and in this view. 3 In the Name dialog. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Manage Place and Locations. select True North for Orientation.

click Close. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . do so before continuing. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. In this exercise. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 10 On the File menu. click Open. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. On the Options Bar. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You can save the file if you wish. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. If you have not completed the exercise. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. Select Site_Project. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin.rvt and click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area.

6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. under Category. and click Add. 3 In the New Schedule dialog.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Count. and click OK. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click the Fields tab. select Doors. click Schedule/Quantities. 5 Under Available fields.

8 Click OK. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. under Other. You have completed this tutorial. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. select Family and Type for Sort by. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. clear Itemize every instance. In this exercise. right-click Door Schedule. and then click OK twice. 13 On the File menu. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. click Save. and click Properties. 14 On the File menu. click Close. expand Schedules/Quantities. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. 12 Select Grand totals.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. and click OK. they are not saved to project files or template files. which is independent of the project settings. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. 4 Under Colors. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. journal cleanup options. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 8 In the New Project dialog. you modify the system environment. Modifying System Settings In this lesson.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. you create an office template. 803 . Notice that the drawing area is black. select Invert background color. Finally. selection default options.rte. 6 In the New Project dialog. click the Graphics tab. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Training Files. click Browse. notification preferences. 3 In the Options dialog. click OK. and set it as your default template. In the first lesson. under Template file. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. In the second lesson. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. These settings control the graphics. and your username when using worksets.

and open Metric\m_Settings. select yellow. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 22 When prompted to save changes. the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 In the Color dialog. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 26 In the Options dialog. 15 Click OK. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. click the value for Selection color. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. For Tooltip assistance. click Training Files. clear Invert background color. 18 On the Design Bar. click the Graphics tab. click Modify. and click OK. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 13 Click the General tab. 14 Under Notifications. 19 On the Design Bar. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. and select the wall. click Wall. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. select None. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 11 Under Colors. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. click the Graphics tab. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.10 In the Options dialog. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .rvt. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. However. For Selection color. click No. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. select One hour. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. When an error occurs. select red.

architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. family template files. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. and family libraries. such as in a large. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. do not save the changes. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. This path is set automatically during the installation process. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 2 In the Options dialog. and click Open. Specifying File Locations on page 805. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 3 Under Default template file. 7 In the Options dialog. select Normal. click Browse. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. These files are used in the software support process. For Tooltip assistance. 8 Click Cancel. 10 In the Places dialog. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. notice the list of library names. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Click Cancel. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. TIP To view a template. under Default path for family template files. If prompted. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. click the File Locations tab. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. including your default project template. centralized. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. and click Browse to select a template. 5 Under Default path for user files. you can start a new project with that template. click Browse. Under Username. select your preferred Save reminder interval. However. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). Under Journal File Cleanup. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.27 Click the General tab. click Browse. Your login name displays by default. you specify default file locations. select the folder to save your files to by default. click Places. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component.

and change the name to My Library. saving. and Import dialogs. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. When you are opening. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. under Libraries. Load. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 11 In the Places dialog.library names and path. templates. or families. click (Add Value). TIP You may want to create a new folder first. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. and select it as the library path. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . or loading a Revit Architecture file. and click the icon side of the field. Save. and you can create new libraries. and click Open. In the following illustration. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open.

9 In the text editor. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. (Remove Value) to delete the library. view the current path. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK twice. Save. and decal image files. 19 Click Cancel. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. If you work in a large office. custom color files. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . enter sheetmtl-Cu. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 2 In the Options dialog. click Edit. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. 28 Click OK. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. and Import dialogs. 3 Under Settings. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 23 Select My Library. specify the new location here. 15 Under Library Name. 24 Click 25 Click OK. click Edit. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. click the Spelling tab. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. click the My Library icon. 22 Click Places. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. such as bump maps. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. click My Library.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. scroll down the list of building industry terms. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. If you want to relocate this path. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. This path is determined during installation. 5 In the text editor. Load.

19 Under Settings. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Browse. click Text. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. under Template file. work with snapping turned off. click OK. 23 In the Options dialog. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. You can turn snap settings on and off. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click OK. you modify snap settings. As you zoom in and out within a view. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 2 In the New Project dialog. click default template.11 In the Options dialog. If prompted. 21 In the text editor. click Training Files. click the Spelling tab. 14 Click in the drawing area. 20 Under Personal dictionary. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. In this exercise. 18 In the Options dialog. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click File menu ➤ Save. delete sheetmtl-CU. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click Edit. you modify snap increments. click Modify. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU.rte. 22 In the text editor. do not save the changes. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. click Restore Defaults. 4 In the New Project dialog.

you can also use the zoom shortcut keys.6 Under Dimension Snaps. and enter 500 . you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. clear Chain.. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. While sketching. enter SM. If you do not have a wheel button. For example. TIP To zoom while sketching. If it does not. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. click OK. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . and move the cursor to the right. 8 In the Snaps dialog. such as ZO to zoom out. use the wheel button on your mouse. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 7 Under Object Snaps. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. click Wall. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . snapping reverts to the system default settings. zoom out until it does so. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. After you click to place the object at the midpoint.

click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Notice that snapping is once again active. Do not set the wall end point. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 24 Click OK. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. If you move the cursor along the wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and move the cursor to the right. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .. the midpoint. and click Wall. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 21 Move the cursor downward. and do not save the file.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. and specify the wall endpoint. and delete the value 500 . 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 18 Enter SM. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. and the wall edges. click Modify. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. it will snap to the endpoints. This is the increment that you added previously. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 26 Proceed to the next lesson.

Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. You create and modify materials. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . you render a region to observe the changes. save the project file with a unique name. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. lines. annotations.rvt. and open Metric\m_Settings.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. In the steps that follow. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. and object styles. fill patterns. click Training Files. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you apply a material to an element. Using these options. Finally. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu.

11 Click OK. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. 10 Click the Graphics tab. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class.Fieldstone. In the Materials dialog. for Class. and double-click 02 Entry Level. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 9 Click Apply. When you change properties of a render appearance. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. enter Masonry . and texture of the material. However.Fieldstone. These details will display in rendered images. When a model element is loaded into a project. The Render Appearance Library is a local. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. and click OK. In the next exercise. 2 Scroll down the materials list. this material provides a starting point for the new material. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. In the steps that follow. read-only library for render appearances. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. and click (Element Properties). scale. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 Select the lower exterior wall. and click OK. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . Masonry . Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. select Stone. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. 6 Click Replace. and select Masonry .Stone. The properties describe the color.Fieldstone material. 3 Click (Duplicate). This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point.

and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. click in the Material field. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 18 For Finish 1. 15 Click Duplicate. Fieldstone on CMU. 20 In the Materials dialog. 23 While pressing CTRL. select Masonry . click Model Graphics Style. 26 On the View Control Bar. click (Default 3D View). 24 In the Type Selector.Fieldstone. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . and click OK.Brick. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . 22 Select the left exterior wall. click Edit.14 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the View toolbar. select the rear exterior wall. . When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. click This is the material that you created. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . 16 Enter the new wall name. 17 For Structure. 19 On the right side of the Material field. 21 Click OK three times. click Edit/New. and click OK. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU.Fieldstone.

Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. select the render region (a red rectangle). 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. for Setting. click Rendering Dialog. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. 32 In the Rendering dialog. right-click the Design Bar. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and click Rendering. When finished. In the following exercise. select Low or Medium. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. select Region. 29 In the 3D view. The rendering process begins. click Render. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. 31 In the Rendering dialog.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. 28 In the Rendering dialog. under Quality.

and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. in the Rendering dialog.rvt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. 5 Click New. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 7 Under Custom. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. and double-click West. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. click Import. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. click Show the model. 33 In the Rendering dialog. m_Settings-in progress. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. and clear Region.rvt. click Show the model. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 3 Under Pattern Type. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. choose Model. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . select Custom. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. such as steel. Zoom into the model. Drafting pattern density is fixed. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Elevations. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. Then click Render again.

click OK. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. (Element Properties). 9 Under Custom. click Modify. 21 In the Materials dialog. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. and click OK. 23 On the Design Bar.Fieldstone.Fieldstone material. 22 Click OK three times. and for Import scale. click Edit/New. select Model. click in the Material field. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. In the Materials dialog.pat. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click 15 For Structure. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry .8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Under Surface Pattern. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. click Edit. 11 Click OK. enter . 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. click .56. and click OK. click to select a fill pattern. click Training Files. under Pattern Type. 10 For Name. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. enter Fieldstone. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . select fldstn. for Finish 1.

You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. 2 On the keyboard. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. expand 3D Views.rvt. For example. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 3 Windows. you can set the window frame material to By Category. m_Settings-in progress.25 On the View toolbar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. there are often multiple window types within a project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. TIP If the pattern does not display. adjust your zoom settings as needed. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). click (Default 3D View).

4 Select one of the rectangular windows. for Trim Exterior Material. 5 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click (Element Properties). 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). click By Category (located under the materials list). click in the Value column. 8 In the Materials dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. . under Materials and Finishes. click in the Value column. 14 In the Materials dialog. and click 15 Click OK twice.3 On the View Control Bar. and click . click Modify. click By Category. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. for Trim Exterior Material. under Materials and Finishes. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 9 Click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 Select the arched window. 16 On the Design Bar.

the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. 19 For Trim. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. descriptions. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. or keywords include the word red. (Duplicate). expand Windows. When you render a 3D view. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . type red. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. 25 In the search field. 29 In the Materials dialog. . 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. select Trim. enter Trim . 30 In the Object Styles dialog. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. for Name. select Paint. click OK.red paint. 28 Under Shading. 23 Click Replace. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. click in the Material column. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. 18 On the Model Objects tab. and click OK.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. and click OK. click OK. for Class. and select Trim.

820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Use object styles to apply the change to all views. select Red. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.rvt. Now that you have created a line pattern. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. under Category.rvt. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. enter Roof Line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. 11 For Line Pattern. m_Settings-in progress. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. for Name. m_Settings-in progress. select Roof Line. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. select Roofs. (Default 3D view). 10 For Line Color. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 On the View Control Bar. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820.31 On the View toolbar. click New. is open with the 3D view active.

but not the line pattern. 13 In the Project Browser. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. 14 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the line color displays in this view. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 .12 Click OK. click Model Graphics Style. double-click to Building. under 3D Views.

select Roof Line. sections. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. click Override. 22 On the Model Categories tab. select Roofs. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. select Solid. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. under Category. Plans. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 15 In the Project Browser. select Roofs. For Pattern. For Color. double-click 03 Roof. elevations. 19 For Line Pattern. under Floor Plans. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. 20 Click OK. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 18 For Line Color. select Black. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select 5. for Visibility.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Blue. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

29 For Name. specify the following: ■ For Plane. select Zoning Setback. select Double dash. click New. 33 In the Type Selector. Click Click (Draw). 30 For the Zoning Setback category. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser.25 Click OK twice. For Line Pattern. select Red. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. select 2. click Lines. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This places the line above the topography. under Floor Plans. and click OK. For Line Color. 34 On the Options Bar. select Level: 02 Entry Level. 31 Click OK. enter Zoning Setback. (Line). ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . 28 In the Line Styles dialog. under Modify Subcategories. Notice the site topography and the property lines. double-click Site.

select it. NOTE If Site is not selected. (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. 44 On the View toolbar. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 43 Click OK. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. and clear Zoning Setback. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Default 3D View). and clear Zoning Setback. 38 On the Model Categories tab. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 40 In the Project Browser. 36 On the View toolbar. double-click 02 Entry Level. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. and clear Property Lines.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. Modifying Annotations on page 825. Expand Site. and then clear Property Lines. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 39 Click OK. expand Lines.

6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 5 Under Text. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. m_Settings-in progress. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 7 Click OK twice. 4 Enter the name Linear . click Dimension. To place a dimension. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. and place a dimension on the floor plan.Modifying Annotations In this exercise.rvt. 10 On the Standard toolbar. Modifying Annotations | 825 .rvt. and then click outside the second wall. You have created a new dimension style.Imperial and click OK. select Feet and fractional inches. 9 In the Type Selector. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. click the default value. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Units. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. for Units Format. select Linear . is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. (Undo). double-click 02 Entry Level. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. click Modify.Imperial. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. click another wall. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. m_Settings-in progress. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. click one wall.

notice that the label displays 1i.rfa. clear Leader. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . 22 Under Loaded Tags.Number as the assigned tag. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 21 In the Tags dialog. 19 Click Load. click M_Window Tag . 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 16 Click Cancel. select the 3 window tags. Then press Delete. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 While pressing CTRL. In the preview image. 23 Click OK. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. click Tag All Not Tagged. scroll down to Windows.14 On the Options Bar. In the steps that follow. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. Leave M_Window Tag . you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark.Number. 28 On the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 27 On the west wall. click (Element Properties).Number. click the bottom window. 26 On the Options Bar. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Category. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. click Training Files. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Tags dialog.Number is now the assigned tag.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 9 Under Doors and Windows. verify that Create is clear. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. select Openings. (Default 3D View). dimension values display using this setting. Unless overridden.Under Category. In the final section. the other displays the instance value. 2 In the Project Units dialog. click the default value. for Rounding. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. and Detail Level Options on page 827.Temporary Dimensions. M_Window Tag . select To the nearest 100. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. m_Settings-in progress. and Detail Level Options | 827 . select meters squared. for Area. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. you modify the temporary dimension settings. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 On the Design Bar. Click OK. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project.rvt. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. and click OK. click the default value. Unless overridden. 30 Under Leader. 6 Click OK. 32 On the View toolbar. dimensions use these project settings. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Faces. Temporary Dimensions. you specify the project units of measurements.Number.Temporary Dimensions. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. For Unit symbol. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. and click OK. 4 In the Project Units dialog. select 0 decimal places. click Modify. In the second section. 8 Under Walls. you modify the detail level assignments. notice Window Tags appears twice. Specifying Units of Measurement. and click OK. for Length. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 3 In the Format dialog. Specifying Units of Measurement. In the first section. Specifying Units of Measurement.

expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. In this exercise. 12 Click OK. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and open Common\c_Project_Browser. click Training Files. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. You do not select a view scale to move it. In this table. expand Floor Plans.rvt. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. click . and expand 3D Views.In this project. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table.

and click OK.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. and click OK. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 2 In the Project Browser. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). select Discipline. In the Project Browser. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 10 In the Project Browser. notice that views are grouped by phase. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. select Type/Discipline. and click Apply.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 5 On the Views tab. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 8 Select Phase. In the Project Browser. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . expand each view type.Phase 1-Structure East Wing .

13 Select Sheet Prefix. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 16 Click the Views tab. and click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click the Folders tab. under Sheets. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click New. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. expand each sheet set.

Proceed to the next lesson. and click Open. expand 3D Views. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. expand Complete. click Browse. You can also save these settings in a template file. and click OK. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. Creating an Office Template on page 831. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. when you create a new project. 21 In the Project Browser. levels. the same rules apply. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. you create an office template. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. Creating an Office Template | 831 . All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. 2 Under Template file. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. In this lesson. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work.rte template. Whenever you create a new project or template. navigate to your preferred directory. under Views. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. dimensions styles. enter a unique file name. You can choose from several templates. click Training Files. In the lesson that follows. and view names. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. When you create new projects. and Discipline. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. and expand both Architectural and Structural. and click OK. and open Metric\Templates. In that case. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. View Type (Family and Type). When you create a new template based on an existing template. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. If you want to save this file. For example. you select the starting point for your office template.

and double-click North. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 15 Under Create new. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 7 In the Project Browser. drag a zoom region around the level heads. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. weights. select Project template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. in the drawing area. When you create the material. close them. 12 Under Template File. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. For example. and click OK. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 13 Select the default template. If you want to use a template other than the default. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. In this exercise. you modify the project settings for your new template. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. for Create new. 6 Click OK. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. If you have additional projects open. you can select it now. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. 14 Click Open. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. select Project. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 9 In the Project Browser. click Browse.5 In the New Project dialog. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. Modifying Project Settings on page 832.

Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. or modify existing patterns. Modifying System Settings on page 803. you can set line weights. For more information. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. and imported objects. annotation objects. and change render appearance properties. TIP For more information about creating new materials. or refer to the online help. including color. 4 Click Replace. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. and move model patterns. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. You do this by defining the render appearance. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. see the previous lesson. In the Object Styles dialog. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. texture. and scroll through the list of categories. the changes are saved as part of the project template. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. and materials for model objects. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . you can specify its appearance in rendered images. 13 If necessary. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. specific modifications are not dictated. 2 Scroll down the materials list. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. rotate. 9 Click OK when finished. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. create and modify them as needed. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. create new subcategories. and similar attributes. transparency.During this exercise. line patterns. For more details on modifying these settings. You can align. line colors. or refer to the online help. If you change render appearance properties. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. see a preview of the rendered material. When you create or modify a material. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Observe the materials that are already defined.

The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. 32 To modify a line pattern. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. click Duplicate. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 29 Click OK. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. 20 Click OK. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. or line pattern as needed. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. select it. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 18 For existing line categories. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. and dimensions. You can add and delete view scales. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. create new line subcategories. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. line color. 34 Click OK. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. name the style. and create new subcategories as needed. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. and click Edit. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view.15 Modify categories. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. tags. modify the line weight. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. To see the details of a particular style. 19 If necessary. and specify the properties. select it from this list. such as section lines and dimension lines.

click Format. angular. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 50 To load new annotation tags. 62 Click OK. Linear. Volume. 46 Click OK. 53 For Length. click Duplicate. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. For example. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. and Angle settings. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. when you add a door with the tag option selected. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 58 Click OK. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. select it from this list. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 55 Click OK. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. and specify the properties. In the Tags dialog. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 42 Select the Type drop-down list.40 Click OK. name the style. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. 60 Under Walls. TIP In the drawing area. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. click Load. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. To see the details of a particular style. and choose a decimal symbol. and click OK. 61 Under Doors and Windows. 57 Specify the Slope option.

Although these settings can be saved within a template. create new browser organization types. create new browser organization types. or Fine. In such a case. To move the view scales. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. 68 Delete. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 69 If necessary. However. click the arrows between columns. Medium. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. or edit existing organization types. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. When you create a new view. You can find additional information in Help. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. and move view scales as needed. Each command is available on the Settings menu. click the Views tab. In a typical project. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. 72 If necessary.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. rename. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. 73 Click OK. 64 Review the table. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. or edit existing organization types. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. rename. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. The detail level is based on view scale. Use the table below as a checklist. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. Links to associated tutorials are provided. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. and make modifications in each area as necessary. 65 Click OK. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. 71 Delete. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. For example. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Using the arrows between the columns. 70 Click the Sheets tab. See Setting up If necessary.

In addition. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. and the poche depth. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . you do both. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. You can load any family or group into a template. click Door. if you load every available window type. If you have not completed the previous exercise. title blocks. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. Although the options are endless. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. and electrical fixtures. phase filters. 2 In the Type Selector. you can set the default contour line interval. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. For example. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. If necessary. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. the section cut material. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the steps that follow. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. furniture. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. For example. notice the list of doors already loaded. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. there are some important thoughts to consider. or use the Project Browser. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. If this selection is satisfactory. you can move onto the next component type. modify. Depending on the intended use of this template. However. you could load detail components. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. do so before starting this exercise. or add to this selection. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. or electrical fixtures. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. you may want to delete. you can set up the phases. Although this is possible.

Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. expand Families. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. Notice that each family category is listed. or load a new door type. or modify a door. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. click Load. Enter a name. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. In the Element Properties dialog. Click Duplicate. and click OK. and click OK. create. and click Open. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Make modifications. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Bar. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. and click OK. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Modify type properties. In the Element Properties dialog.3 To modify. Select it. click Edit/New. create. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. click Edit/New.

and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. (Element Properties). To do so. Discipline. right-click the component. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. View Range. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Detail Level. In addition. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded.) 10 Expand the title block. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. and select the title block type. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. In addition. This title block is currently part of the template. you create the views required for your template. click 12 Click Preview. 13 Click OK. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. you created new projects using different templates. To load a title block. 11 On the Options Bar. and click Delete. click Load. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . create. load. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. In this exercise.

and double-click Level 1. 2 Under Names. Every time a new plan view is created. you will first modify view templates. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. 15 In the Project Browser. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. and click OK. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. 11 Click Apply. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. under Floor Plans. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. click Apply. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. At any time. In addition. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. select Site Plan. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. and then click OK. click Apply. 18 If you modified any other view templates. under Floor Plans. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. 4 If necessary. and apply the appropriate template. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. double-click South. 6 Click OK. the view is not linked to the template in any way. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. under Elevations. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. After applying the template.settings of categories and subcategories. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. double-click Site. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. select Architectural Plan. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. and click OK. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. double-click Level 2. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. you can apply a view template to any view. 12 In the Project Browser. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. open the view from the Project Browser. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In this exercise. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.

21 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. and select the desired direction. 27 Create additional levels as needed. under Floor Plans. (Default 3D View). 24 On the Options Bar. use the ViewCube. To orient the 3D view to a direction. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. duplicate. right-click the ViewCube. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. 30 In the Project Browser. By default. click Orient to View. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . in the shortcut menu. a face. review the existing floor plans. If it does not display. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. notice that you have the option to rename. and. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. and click Rename. Rename. expand 3D Views. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. Black level heads have no associated views. ceiling plans. select Make Plan View. and click Properties. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. click Orient to a Direction. and elevations. If you want to modify view properties. Blue level heads have associated plan views. on the View toolbar. in the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. enter a view name. or delete them as needed. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. right-click {3D}. 20 In the Project Browser. If prompted. To orient the 3D view to another view. under Floor Plans. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. review the floor plans. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. or an edge of the ViewCube. click Level. right-click the view name. click Schedule/Quantities. 23 To add more levels to the template. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. 31 Rename the 3D View. click 29 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Project Browser. and click Save View. under 3D Views. duplicate. right-click the ViewCube.Notice the level names. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select the desired view. or delete this view.

35 If you want to add schedules to your template. and click OK. Select a view. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Right-click the sheet name. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. 40 To add views to the sheet. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. select one. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. assign filters. modify settings as needed. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. You are prompted to select a title block. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. and click OK.txt for AutoCAD. When you import a DWG or DXF file. 37 Click OK. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. After the sheet is created. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. or exportlayersdgn. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block.txt for MicroStation). select the default title block. 42 Create new sheets as needed. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. in the Project Browser. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. click Sheet. On the Formatting tab. On the Appearance tab. modify settings as needed. select the title block and delete it. On the Filter tab. and modify their properties accordingly. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. and click Add View to Sheet. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . You can still add views to the sheet. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the category type. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. and click Rename. and click OK. click Add View.You can add schedules to a template. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Sheets (all). To later add a title block to a sheet. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. on the View tab of the Design Bar. To do so. select and order required fields. modify settings as needed.

Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. and so on. name the file.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. windows. name the file. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. and click Save. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. 8 In the dialog. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. and click Save. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . therefore. and related multi-category tags and schedules. 2 For each category. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. They cannot be shared with other projects. click Save As. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. name the file. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Using shared parameters. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. When scheduling. for example. 9 Click Save As. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. You can save these mappings to a text file. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. project parameters. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. 5 For each category. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. These settings are retained within the project template. doors. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. and so on. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. select Save As. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. When you create a multi-category schedule. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. and they become the set mappings for the project. and click Save. For example.

and choose a shared parameter. 8 Under Parameters. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. and select Shared Parameter. click New. and specify its discipline and type. click New. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. 26 Click OK. enter a parameter name. 6 Create as many groups as needed.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. 21 Under Categories. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. select a parameter value type. click Add. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. 14 Click Add. 17 Under Discipline. select a group to add parameters to. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. select a parameter discipline type. project parameters. and click OK. 18 Under Type of Parameter. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 19 Under Group parameter under. 2 Click Create. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. for Name. 9 Name the parameter. 24 To add a shared project parameter. 5 Enter the group name. you can create a list of parameters. 3 Name and save the file. 11 For each parameter group. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 16 Under Parameter Data. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. For each parameter group. add required parameters. you may want to save the file to a network location. 22 Click OK. select Project parameter. because each office has a unique set of needs. 25 Click Select. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . If this template will be used by multiple team members. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. If a file already exists. 23 Add project parameters as needed. 10 Click OK. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. under Groups.

Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. 28 Click OK. The tag is now part of the template. and print. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. 5 Click Save As. and the percent of actual size. In this exercise. 2 Under Printer. 32 Navigate to the directory. By creating named settings within the template. For each printer.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. for Name. 6 In the New dialog. or refer to the online help. click OK. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. For information on creating multi-category tags. Click OK. make minor modifications if necessary. select Multi-Category. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 35 For Name. By going first to the Print command. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. and click OK. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . save the file as a template. click Schedule/Quantities. you can set options such as sheet sizes. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. select the tag. click Setup. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. 34 For Category. you can load them into the template. you create named print settings. 37 When you have completed the schedule. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. enter a name for the schedule. and click Open. paper placement. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and make it your default template file. 4 Modify the printer settings. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 3 Under Settings. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. you need only select a setting. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed.

select it. enter a new name for the printer. Your template is complete. If you need to share this file with others. 23 For Default template file. 25 Click OK. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. and click Open.rte). In addition. and click OK. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . By investing the time to individualize your template. 22 Click the File Locations tab. In this lesson.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. save it in a network location. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. If you have a project. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. Create additional settings as needed. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. The only remaining task is to save it. you modified settings. loaded components. 9 In the Print dialog. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. modify the printer settings. click Browse. and click Open. and create new settings for this printer. You can also set this template as your default template. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. In addition. and saved them to a template. 19 Select the template. 11 Click Close when finished. This can provide a good starting point for a template. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 24 Navigate to the template location. click Setup. 20 Click OK. 18 Click Browse. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select a different printer. click Save as. 15 Name the template. 14 Under Save as type. and click Save. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. select Template Files (*.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful